manualshive.com logo in svg

Kyocera TASKalfa 3050ci, Service Manual, Page: 274 / 936

Share
Download
Kyocera TASKalfa 3050ci Service Manual Download Page 274

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC

1-3-180

U467

Setting the color registration adjustment

Description

Sets the color registration adjustment and transfer belt speed correction. Also, determines the 
conditions by which color registration correction is executed depending on the LSU temperature.

Purpose

If color variance is uneven due to a sensor failure, etc., turn this off and temporarily make a man-
ual adjustment.

Method

1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.

Setting: [Color Regist]

1. Select On or Off.

Initial setting: On

2. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Setting: [Timing]

1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.

2. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion

Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Item No.

Description

Display

Description

Color Regist

Setting the color registration correction operation

Timing

After the previous correction is executed, color registration is 
compensated as the LSU temperature varies by the value 
determined.

Display

Description

On

Enables the color registration correction operation.

Off

Disables the color registration correction operation.

Display

Description

Setting 

range

Initial 

setting

Timing

Conditions for execution depending on 
the LSU temperature variation

2 to 10

10

Summary of Contents for TASKalfa 3050ci

Page 1: ...SERVICE MANUAL Published in March 2011 842LC112 2LCSM062 Rev 2 TASKalfa 3050ci TASKalfa 3550ci TASKalfa 4550ci TASKalfa 5550ci ...

Page 2: ...ELE DE TYPE INCORRECT METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d égout municipales Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée Notation of products in the manual For the purpose of this service manual products are id...

Page 3: ... 3 174 1 3 176 to 1 3 178 1 3 181 1 3 185 1 3 187 1 3 190 1 3 191 1 3 193 1 3 198 1 4 3 to 1 4 25 1 4 28 to 1 4 49 1 4 53 1 4 59 1 4 61 1 4 62 1 4 65 to 1 4 68 1 4 73 1 4 81 1 4 82 1 4 84 1 4 89 to 1 4 92 1 4 94 1 4 100 1 4 103 to 1 4 108 1 5 3 1 5 4 1 5 10 1 5 11 1 5 15 1 5 19 1 5 20 1 5 25 1 5 30 1 5 33 to 1 5 35 1 5 39 1 5 40 1 5 41 1 5 43 1 5 45 1 5 47 1 5 49 1 5 52 1 5 54 1 5 61 1 5 62 1 5 66...

Page 4: ...This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 5: ...rsonnel to ensure the safety of their customers their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities ...

Page 6: ... this symbol CAUTION Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com pliance with warning messages using this symbol Symbols The triangle symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol General warning Warning of risk of electric shock Warning of high temperature indicates a prohibited...

Page 7: ...d or dusty place This may cause fire or electric shock Do not install the copier near a radiator heater other heat source or near flammable material This may cause fire Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance Always handle the machine by the correct ...

Page 8: ... carefully Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection Check that the power cable covering is free of damage Check that the power plug is dust free If it is dirty clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers Leaking laser light may damage eyesight Handle the charger section...

Page 9: ... caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling Replace with new ones if necessary Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below Use only a small amount of solvent at a time being careful not to spill Wipe spills off completely Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents Allow applied solve...

Page 10: ...This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 11: ... maintenance item 1 3 1 2 Maintenance modes item list 1 3 2 3 Contents of the maintenance mode items 1 3 11 1 4 Troubleshooting 1 4 1 Paper misfeed detection 1 4 1 1 Paper misfeed indication 1 4 1 2 Paper misfeed detection condition 1 4 2 1 4 2 Self diagnostic function 1 4 27 1 Self diagnostic function 1 4 27 2 Self diagnostic codes 1 4 28 1 4 3 Image formation problems 1 4 92 1 No image appears e...

Page 12: ...ns 1 5 1 2 Drum 1 5 1 3 Toner 1 5 1 4 How to tell a genuine Kyocera Mita toner container 1 5 2 1 5 2 Paper feed section 1 5 3 1 Detaching and refitting the primary paper feed unit 1 5 3 2 Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley 30 ppm model 35 ppm model 1 5 7 3 Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley 45 ppm...

Page 13: ...g the transfer belt filter 1 5 84 5 Detaching and refitting the DU filter 1 5 85 6 Detaching and refitting the left filter 1 5 86 7 Detaching and refitting the hard disk unit 1 5 87 8 Detaching and refitting the eject unit 1 5 89 9 Direction of installing the principal fan motors 1 5 90 1 6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1 6 1 Upgrading the firmware 1 6 1 1 6 2 Remarks on main PWB replacement 1 6...

Page 14: ... 3 87 2 3 11 LSU relay PWB 2 3 91 2 4 Appendixes 2 4 1 Appendixes 2 4 1 1 Maintenance kits 2 4 1 2 Repetitive defects gauge 2 4 3 3 Firmware environment commands 2 4 4 4 Chart of image adjustment procedures 2 4 11 5 Wiring diagram 2 4 13 INSTALLATION GUIDE DOCUMENT PROCESSOR PAPER FEEDER LARGE CAPACITY FEEDER SIDE DECK SIDE MULTI TRAY 1000 SHEETS FINISHER 4000 SHEETS FINISHER FINISHER ATTACHMENT K...

Page 15: ...lope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Ledger Legal Letter LetterR ExecutiveR Statement Oficio II 12 18 Folio 8K 16K 16KR Custom Zoom level Manual mode 25 to 400 1 increments Auto mode Preset zoom Printing speed B W A4 30 ppm Letter 30 ppm A4R 21 ppm LetterR 21 ppm A3 15 ppm Ledger 15 ppm B4 18 ppm Legal 18 ppm B5 30 ppm A4 35 p...

Page 16: ...sheets 80 g m2 Continuous copying 1 to 999 sheets Light source LED Scanning system Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor Photoconductor a Si drum diameter 30 mm Image write system Semiconductor laser Charging system Charger roller Developing system Touch down developing system Developer 2 component Toner replenishing Automatic from the toner container Transfer system Primary Transfer belt Secondar...

Page 17: ...50 60 Hz more than 7 2 A Options Document processor Original cover Paper feeder Large capacity feeder Side deck Side multi tray Side paper feeder Side large capacity feeder 1000 sheet finisher 4000 sheet finisher Center folding unit Mailbox Punch unit Inner job separator Right job separator Key counter Fax kit Expansion memory Internet fax kit A Data security kit Printed document guard kit Emulati...

Page 18: ... 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200 100 dpi 200 400 dpi File format TIFF JPEG XPS PDF MMR JPEG compression PDF high compres sion Scanning speed A4 landscape 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo orig inal Simplex B W 70 images min Color 70 images min B W 80 images min Color 80 images min Duplex B W 100 images min Color 80 images min B W 140 images min Color 110 images min Interface Ethernet 10 BASE T ...

Page 19: ...ss 3 Toner container K 4 Toner container M 5 Toner container C 6 Toner container Y 7 Platen Contact glass 8 Clip holder 9 Operation panel 10 Indicators 11 Handles 12 Release button 13 Waste toner box 14 Waste toner tray 15 Front cover 16 Toner container release lever 17 Network interface connector 18 USB port 19 USB interface connector 20 Option interface ...

Page 20: ...4 USB port 25 Cassettes 26 Paper length guide 27 Guide lock lever 28 Paper width guide 29 Paper width adjusting tab 30 Paper conveying unit 31 Paper conveying unit lever 32 Duplex cover lever 33 Duplex cover 34 MP paper width guide 35 MP support Tray 36 MP Multi Purpose tray 37 Paper conveying cover lever 38 Paper conveying cover 39 Handle 40 Main power switch ...

Page 21: ...6 1 Machine 2 Document processor dual scan DP 3 Document processor reversed DP 4 Paper feeder 5 Large capacity feeder 6 Side deck 7 Side multi tray 8 Side paper feeder 9 Side large capacity feeder 10 1000 sheet finisher 11 4000 sheet finisher 12 Center folding unit 13 Mailbox ...

Page 22: ...o color key 7 Quick no search key 8 Clear key 9 Reset key 10 System menu key 11 Power key 12 Counter key 13 Main power indicator 14 Application key 15 Document box key 16 Send key 17 FAX key 18 Full color key 19 Processing indicator 20 Black and White key 21 Memory indicator 22 Numeric keys 23 Enter key 24 Attention indicator 25 Start key 26 Stop key 27 Interrupt key 28 Authentication Logout key 2...

Page 23: ...d section 3 Paper conveying section 4 Optical section 5 Laser scanner unit 6 Drum unit K 7 Drum unit M 8 Drum unit C 9 Drum unit Y 10 Developer unit K 11 Developer unit M 12 Developer unit C 13 Developer unit Y 14 Toner container section 15 Primary transfer section 16 Secondary transfer Separa tion sections 17 Fuser section 18 Eject Feed shift sections 19 Duplex section ...

Page 24: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 1 1 10 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 25: ...mperature and cool or hot direct air Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine Place the machine on a level surface maximum allowance inclination 1 Avoid air borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor such as mercury acidic of alkaline vapors inorganic gasses NOx SOx gases and chlorine base...

Page 26: ...scanner mirror frame Start Release of lift plate stopper Loading paper Installing the toner containers Unlocking the developer waste exit Installing the waste toner box Adjusting the image Connect the power cord Installing other optional devices Installing the original platen or DP option Replacing operation panel sheet Installing the cassette heater option Completion of the machine installation ...

Page 27: ... 2LM 2LC 1 2 3 Moving the machine When moving the machine pull out three carrying handles and move with carrying handles and the hand hold Figure 1 2 2 Carrying handle Carrying handle Carrying handle Handhold ...

Page 28: ...Inner case 4 Top pad 5 Skid 6 Bottom sheet 7 Bottom pad 8 Bottom front left pad 9 Bottom front right pad 10 Bottom rear left pad 11 Bottom rear right pad 12 Rear pad 13 Machine cover 14 Document tray 15 Power cord 16 Plastic bag 17 Paper size plates 18 Paper media plates 19 Operation panel sheets 20 Operation guide etc 21 Eject spacer 22 Waste toner box 23 Barcode label 24 Hinge joints ...

Page 29: ... 1 Remove three tapes and then remove two A3 papers 2 Remove seven tapes and then remove three protect sheets Figure 1 2 5 Removing the eject spacer Waste toner box Eject spacer Silica gel Removing the tapes Tape Tape Tape A3 papers Tapes Tape Tape Protect sheet Protect sheet Protect sheet Tapes Tape ...

Page 30: ...nal paper feeder or large capacity feeder as necessary 2 Verify levelness at the four corners of the contact glass using a level gauge and adjust the level bolts at the bottom of the machine to optimize levelness Tapes Tapes Tape Tape Tape Tape Installing the paper feeder option ...

Page 31: ... 2 7 1 Remove the scanner lock cover 2 Mount the scanner lock cover in the reverse manner to restore in the original location Figure 1 2 7 Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame Scanner lock cover Locked Released ...

Page 32: ...to the storage location When moving the machine attach the lift plate in original position Figure 1 2 8 1 Squeeze the ends of the bottom of the paper length guide and move the guide to fit the length of the paper Figure 1 2 9 Release of lift plate stopper Lift plate stopper Cassette Loading paper Paper length guide ...

Page 33: ...paper width guides to fit the paper Figure 1 2 10 4 Align the paper flush against the right side of the cassette Before loading the paper be sure that it is not curled or folded Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicated Figure 1 2 11 Guide lock lever Paper width adjusting tab paper width guides Paper ...

Page 34: ... 5 Press the guide lock lever to lock Figure 1 2 12 6 Fold the paper size plate and the paper media plate in two and insert 7 Gently push the cassette back in Figure 1 2 13 Guide lock lever Paper media plate Paper size plate ...

Page 35: ...and hit in the same way 3 Hold the toner container horizontally and shake from side to side about 3 times Figure 1 2 14 4 Install four color toner containers 5 Turn down the toner container release levers to lock the four color toner con tainers Figure 1 2 15 Installing the toner containers Toner container Toner container Toner container Toner container Release lever Y C M K ...

Page 36: ...e fixing pin in four positions and rotate Fully insert the fixing pin keeping the line vertical and rotate by 90 degrees clock wise Make sure that the central line is horizontal Figure 1 2 16 2 Remove a screw and slide the lever right wards 3 Fix the lever using the screw previously removed at the right screw hole and unlock the developer waste exit When the device is shipped again or removed use ...

Page 37: ...waste exit see page 1 2 12 1 Push the release button and pull out the waste toner tray 2 Open the lid and install the waste toner box 3 Push the waste toner tray back in 4 Close the front cover Figure 1 2 18 Installing the waste toner box Release button Waste toner tray Waste toner box Lid 1 2 ...

Page 38: ...ert a flat head screwdriver and slide the operation panel covers A and B to remove them Figure 1 2 19 2 Remove the clear panel Figure 1 2 20 Replacing operation panel sheet Operation panel cover A Operation panel cover B Clear panel ...

Page 39: ... Install the optional devices job separa tor document finisher and or fax kit etc as necessary 1 Install the optional cassette heater as necessary see page 1 2 64 1 Connect the power cord to the power cord connector on rear lower of the machine 2 Connect the power plug to the wall out let Operation panel sheet Installing the original platen or DP option Installing other optional devices Installing...

Page 40: ...o Press Start A chart is printed Set the output chart for adjustment as the original Press Start to perform Color registration When completed press OK Manual correction Press Next in Manual Press Print of Chart A chart is printed Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match Press Next of Registration and Change Enter the registration values for each chart Press Start to perform...

Page 41: ...g the numeric keys and press the start key Select Today Press the start key The delivery date is set Press the stop key to exit 9 Output status report Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key Select Maintenance Press the start key A status report is output Press the stop key to exit 10 Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key The machine exits the maintenance mode C...

Page 42: ...Selecting the timing for copy counting Eject U276 Setting the copy count mode Mode0 U284 Setting 2 color copy mode Off U285 Setting service status page On U323 Setting abnormal temperature and humidity warning On U325 Setting the paper interval Off 1 U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication On 8 U327 Setting the cassette heater control Off U343 Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Off...

Page 43: ...mbly 1 3029236241 Key counter cover retainer 1 302GR03010 Key counter retainer 1 302GR03020 Key counter cover 1 3066060011 Key counter mount 1 3066060041 Edging 2 7YZM210006 H01 Band 1 M21AH010 M3 x 8 tap tight P screw 1 5MBTPB3008PW R M4 x 10 tap tight P screw 2 5MBTPB4010PW R M4 x 10 tap tight S screw 2 5MBTPB4010TW R M3 x 6 bronze flat head screw 2 7BB003306H M4 x 20 tap tight S screw 2 7BB1004...

Page 44: ... mount to the key counter cover using two screws 4 Fit the key counter retainer to the key counter mount using two screws Figure 1 2 22 5 Pull the paper conveying unit out 6 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover 7 Remove the screw and five hooks and then remove the right upper cover Figure 1 2 23 M3 x 6 flat head screws Key counter mount Key counter cover M4 x 6 screw M4 x 6 screw ...

Page 45: ... 8 Cut out the aperture plate on the right upper cover using nippers Figure 1 2 24 9 Remove seven screws and then remove the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 25 Right upper cover Aperture Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screw Screws ...

Page 46: ...s and then remove the left upper cover Figure 1 2 26 13 Release six wire saddles on the control ler box 14 Remove the wire holder Figure 1 2 27 Screws Controller lid Left upper cover Left upper cover Hooks Hooks Hook Wire holder Wire saddle Wire saddles Wire saddle Controller box Wire saddle ...

Page 47: ...lifting up the lock lever see figure a When connecting the FFC that there is a projection in the terminal both sides lock by knocking down the lock lever after inserting the FFC to the connector until both projections are hidden see figure b Figure 1 2 28 Controller box State of lock Lock release FFC detaching Main PWB Main PWB FFC connection Lock a b 1 Lock lever Lock lever FFC 2 2 Lock lever FFC...

Page 48: ...ook two hooks and then remove the controller box Figure 1 2 29 18 Connect the connector of the key coun ter wire to the connector YC24 on the engine PWB Figure 1 2 30 Controller box Screws Hook Hook Screws Screw Engine PWB Key counter wire YC24 Engine PWB ...

Page 49: ...ease three wire saddles 22 Remove the wire holder 23 Route the key counter wire through the three wire saddles and wire guide and fix it at the wire holder 24 Refit the controller box 25 Refit the left upper cover and the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 32 Wire holders Wire guide key counter wire Wire holder Wire saddles Wire saddle Wire guide key counter wire ...

Page 50: ...27 Insert the projection of the key counter cover retainer in the aperture of the right upper cover 28 Fit the key counter cover retainer using the two M4 x 20 screws Figure 1 2 34 M4 nuts Right upper cover Right upper cover Aperture Key counter cover retainer M4 x 20 screw M4 x 20 screw Projection ...

Page 51: ...Insert the key counter into the key counter socket assembly 36 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 37 Run maintenance item U204 and select Key Counter see page 1 3 110 38 Exit the maintenance mode 39 Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the touch panel when the key coun ter is pulled out 40 Check that the counter counts up as cop...

Page 52: ...6241 Key counter cover retainer 1 302GR03010 Key counter retainer 1 302GR03020 Key counter cover 1 3066060011 Key counter mount 1 3066060041 Edging 2 7YZM210006 H01 Band 1 M21AH010 M3 x 8 tap tight P screw 1 5MBTPB3008PW R M4 x 10 tap tight P screw 2 5MBTPB4010PW R M4 x 10 tap tight S screw 2 5MBTPB4010TW R M3 x 6 bronze flat head screw 2 7BB003306H M4 x 20 tap tight S screw 2 7BB100420H M3 nut 1 ...

Page 53: ... Mount two M4 nuts at the back of the right upper cover 3 Fit the tray stay to the right upper cover using two M4 x 14 screws Secure the screws making sure that the nuts do not fall Figure 1 2 37 M4 nut M4 nut Right upper cover M4 x 14 screw M4 x 14 screw Tray stay M4 nut M4 nut Right upper cover M4 x 14 screw M4 nut ...

Page 54: ...ight job separator has been installed Figure 1 2 38 5 Pass the connector of the key counter wire through the aperture in the right upper cover 6 Refit the right upper cover 7 Refit the ISU right cover 8 Close the paper conveying unit Figure 1 2 39 Tray retainer Tray retainer M4 x 8 screw M4 x 8 screw Right upper cover Screw Key counter wire Aperture ...

Page 55: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 1 2 31 9 Snap in the tray mount to the tray stay and fix using two M4 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 40 M4 x 8 screw Tray stay Tray mount M4 x 8 screw ...

Page 56: ...he tray cover to the tray stay using four M4 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 41 12 Fit the key counter cover retainer using two M4 x 20 tap tight S screws Figure 1 2 42 M4 x 8 screws Aperture Tray cover Tray cover M4 x 8 screws Key counter cover retainer M4 x 20 tap tight S screw M4 x 20 tap tight S screw ...

Page 57: ...e in the document table 14 Fit the key counter cover to the docu ment table using the M4 x 6 screw 15 Connect the key counter signal cable to the key counter wire Figure 1 2 43 Aperture Key counter cover Key counter signal cable Key counter signal cable Key counter wire M4 x 6 screw ...

Page 58: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 1 2 34 16 Fit the tray lower cover Install the key counter signal cable and key counter wire so that they are held behind the tray lower cover Figure 1 2 44 Tray lower cover Connector ...

Page 59: ...Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 21 Run maintenance item U204 and select Key Counter see page 1 3 110 22 Exit the maintenance mode 23 Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the touch panel when the key coun ter is pulled out 24 Check that the counter counts up as copies are made Figure 1 2 46 Pin Tray lower cover Pin Sheet Docum...

Page 60: ... MK 2 option for japan only Key card installation requires the following parts Parts Quantity Part No Key card MK 2 1 8J272002 option MK 2 mount 1 Supplied with MK 2 M4 x 16 screw 2 Document table 1 1902H70UN1 option M4 x 20 tap tight S screw 2 7BB100420H ...

Page 61: ... the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Pull the paper conveying unit out 3 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover 4 Remove the screw and five hooks and then remove the right upper cover Figure 1 2 47 5 Remove seven screws and then remove the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 48 ISU right cover Screws Right upper cover Screw Right upper cover Hooks Hook Hook Rear upper cover Screws Screws...

Page 62: ... and then remove the left upper cover Figure 1 2 49 9 Release six wire saddles on the control ler box 10 Remove the wire holder Figure 1 2 50 Screws Controller lid Left upper cover Left upper cover Hooks Hooks Hook Wire holder Wire saddle Wire saddles Wire saddle Controller box Wire saddle ...

Page 63: ...lifting up the lock lever see figure a When connecting the FFC that there is a projection in the terminal both sides lock by knocking down the lock lever after inserting the FFC to the connector until both projections are hidden see figure b Figure 1 2 51 Controller box State of lock Lock release FFC detaching Main PWB Main PWB FFC connection Lock a b 1 Lock lever Lock lever FFC 2 2 Lock lever FFC...

Page 64: ... five screws 13 Unhook two hooks and then remove the controller box Figure 1 2 52 14 Cut out the aperture plate on the right upper cover using nippers Figure 1 2 53 Controller box Screws Hook Hook Screws Screw Right upper cover Aperture ...

Page 65: ...pper cover 16 Fit the tray stay to the right upper cover using two M4 x 14 screws Secure the screws making sure that the nuts do not fall Figure 1 2 54 M4 nut M4 nut Right upper cover M4 x 14 screw M4 x 14 screw Tray stay M4 nut M4 nut Right upper cover M4 x 14 screw M4 nut ...

Page 66: ... Snap in the tray mount to the tray stay and fix using two M4 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 55 18 Cut out the aperture plate on the tray cover using nippers Figure 1 2 56 M4 x 8 screw Tray stay Tray mount M4 x 8 screw Aperture Tray cover ...

Page 67: ...43 19 Pass the MK 2 signal cable through the aperture in the tray cover tray stay and right upper cover Figure 1 2 57 Tray stay Right upper cover Aperture Tray corer Aperture Aperture MK 2 MK 2 signal cable MK 2 signal cable ...

Page 68: ... cable to the connector YC25 on the engine PWB 21 Remove the screw from the machine 22 Fix the MK 2 signal cable to the ground terminal with the screw that was removed Figure 1 2 58 Engine PWB MK 2 signal cable Screw Ground terminal Ground terminal Screw YC25 Engine PWB ...

Page 69: ...ugh the wire guide and fix it at three wire holders Dress the MK 2 signal wire away from the scanner motor and fix 25 Refit the controller box 26 Refit the left upper cover and the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 59 Wire holders Wire holder Wire guide Wire guide MK 2 signal cable Scanner motor ...

Page 70: ...an optional right job separator has been installed Figure 1 2 60 28 Refit the right upper cover 29 Refit the ISU right cover 30 Close the paper conveying unit 31 Fit the tray cover to the tray stay using four M4 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 61 Tray retainer Tray retainer M4 x 8 screw M4 x 8 screw M4 x 8 screws Tray cover Tray stay M4 x 8 screws ...

Page 71: ...the MK 2 mount to the MK 2 and secure using the four screws Figure 1 2 62 33 Fit the MK 2 to the document table using two M4 x 20 tap tight S screws Figure 1 2 63 MK 2 mount Screws Screws Screws Screws MK 2 MK 2 MK 2 Document table M4 x 20 tap tight S screw M4 x 20 tap tight S screw ...

Page 72: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 1 2 48 34 Fit the tray lower cover 35 Secure the tray lower cover with two pins Figure 1 2 64 Tray lower cover Pin Pin ...

Page 73: ...e sheet onto right side of the document table 37 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 38 Run maintenance item U204 and select Key Card see page 1 3 110 39 Exit the maintenance mode Figure 1 2 65 Sheet Document table ...

Page 74: ...odule 1 HM000080 option PHS signal cable 1 023CK200 option KMAS interface PWB 1 023CK000 option M3 x 16 bronze binding screw 2 B3323160 Ferrite core 1 2A027770 Clamp 1 M2105910 KMAS wire set 1 302K994610 Parts Quantity Part No KMAS wire 1 302K946AG0 Spacer A 1 7YZM510009 H01 Spacer B 3 7YZM510011 H01 Parts Quantity Part No RS 232C signal cable 1 303CK60011 RS 232C relay cable 1 303CK60041 KMAS int...

Page 75: ... fix KMAS perform the following procedure Fitting the KMAS interface PWB Setting the DIP switch Using the PHS module Fitting the PHS signal cable and PHS module Using a modem Fitting the RS 232C signal cable Initializing the KMAS End Start ...

Page 76: ...his is required when modem is used 3 Communication speed switching with the device ON 9600bps OFF 19200bps Set to OFF 4 Communication log when automatically notifying service calls Switching messages ON Message is fixed OFF Normal message is used When ON the message is Call a service representative When OFF the message will vary depend ing on communication status To setup the system with automatic...

Page 77: ...2 Remove seven screws and then remove the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 67 3 Attach one spacer A and three spacers B to the side of the controller box Figure 1 2 68 Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screw Screws Spacer B Spacer B Spacer A Controller box Spacer B ...

Page 78: ...ace PWB to three spacers B Figure 1 2 69 5 Remove YC7 and YC23 on the main PWB and connector of the controller fan mor Remove the relay wire Figure 1 2 70 Spacer B KMAS interface PWB Spacer B Spacer B Controller fan motor YC23 YC7 Relay wire Main PWB ...

Page 79: ...tor of the KMAS wire to the connector YC1 on the KMAS PWB 7 Connect the connector of the KMAS wire to controller fan motor YC7 and YC23 on the main PWB Figure 1 2 71 KMAS wire KMAS interface PWB YC1 Controller fan motor YC23 YC7 KMAS wire Main PWB ...

Page 80: ...g the PHS signal cable and PHS mod ule 9 Remove two screws and then remove the lid from the rear upper cover 10 Pass the PHS signal cable through the aperture in the rear upper cover 11 Secure the PHS signal cable to rear upper cover with two screws Figure 1 2 73 Wire saddle KMAS wire Edging Screw Screw Screw Lid Rear upper cover PHS signal cable Screw ...

Page 81: ... nal cable to the connector YC2 on the KMAS interface PWB 13 Refit the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 74 14 Fit the PHS module to rear upper cover using two M3 x 16 screws Figure 1 2 75 YC2 PHS signal cable KMAS interface PWB Rear upper cover PHS module M3 x 16 screws ...

Page 82: ... referring to the instructions given to fix the PHS signal wire insert the con nector at the end of the RS 232C relay cable to the YC3 connector on the KMAS interface PWB If the wire length is short use a RS 232C extension cable 2 Connect the RS 232C signal cable to the modem Initializing the KMAS 1 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 2 Run maintenance item U202 and Per fo...

Page 83: ...wer indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Fit the vender base to coin vender using four M4 x 6 screws Figure 1 2 77 Parts Quantity Part No Coin vender 1 1905H99JP0 option Vender wire 1 Supplied with coin vender Ferrite core 1 Clamp 1 Vender signal cable 1 302K946AE0 Coin vender M4 x 6 screws M4 x 6...

Page 84: ...rews and then remove the rear upper cover Figure 1 2 78 4 Remove eight screws 5 Release two hanging parts and then remove the rear lower cover Figure 1 2 79 Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screw Screws Rear lower cover Screw Screw Screws Screws ...

Page 85: ...or of the vender signal cable to the connector YC23 on the engine PWB 8 Pass the vender signal cable through the wire guide and ten wire saddles and then fasten the cable Figure 1 2 81 Screws Lid YC23 Wire saddles Vender signal cable Engine PWB Wire saddles Wire saddle Wire saddles Wire saddle Wire guide ...

Page 86: ...ire to rear frame with the screw 12 Connect the connector of the vender wire to connector of the vender signal cable Figure 1 2 82 13 Refit the rear lower and upper covers 14 Connect the signal cable of coin vender to connector of the vender wire Figure 1 2 83 Screws Vender wire Ground terminal Screw Ground terminal Screw Vender signal cable IF mount Signal cable of coin vender Vender wire ...

Page 87: ...fix the price size decal at the right side of the coin vender operation panel Figure 1 2 85 19 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 20 Run maintenance mode U206 and acti vate Coin vender is installed Continue configuring the coin vender required see page 1 3 111 21 Exit the maintenance mode Screw Clamp Ferrite core Signal cable of coin vender Signal cable of coin vender Coi...

Page 88: ... parts of cassette heater set 302K994940 Parts Quantity Part No Cassette heater set 120V 1 302K994930 Cassette heater set 240V 1 302K994940 Parts Quantity Part No Cassette heater 120V 1 302H794620 Wire saddle 3 7YZM610001 H0 M3 x 8 tap tight S screw 2 7BB700308H Parts Quantity Part No Cassette heater 240V 1 302H794610 Wire saddle 3 7YZM610001 H0 M3 x 8 tap tight S screw 2 7BB700308H ...

Page 89: ... memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Pull the cassette 1 forward 3 Remove the pin and then remove the cassette 1 Figure 1 2 86 4 Pull the cassette 2 forward 5 Remove the pin and then remove the cassette 3 Figure 1 2 87 Pin Cassette1 Pin Cassette2 ...

Page 90: ...LN 2LM 2LC 2 1 2 66 6 Fit three wire saddles on the bottom frame of the machine 7 Fit the cassette heater using two M3 x 8 screws Figure 1 2 88 Cassette heater Screw Screw Wire saddle Wire saddle Wire saddle ...

Page 91: ... connector of the cassette heater to the connector in the rear frame of the machine 9 Pass the wire of the cassette heater through three wire saddles and then fasten the wire Figure 1 2 89 Cassette heater Wire saddles Wire saddle Connector ...

Page 92: ...utlet 2 Open the controller lid 3 Remove two pins and then slot cover of the OPT2 Figure 1 2 90 4 Insert the gigabit ethernet board along the groove in OPT2 and secure the board with two pins that have been removed in step 3 Do not directly touch the gigabit ethernet board terminal Hold the top and bottom of the gigabit ethernet board or the projection of the board to insert the gigabit ethernet b...

Page 93: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 1 2 69 5 Plug the modular connector cable into the line terminal 6 Close the controller lid Figure 1 2 92 Modular connector cable Controller lid ...

Page 94: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 1 2 70 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 95: ...the numeric keys Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up down keys or numeric keys The selected maintenance item is run Press the stop key Press the start key Start End Maintenance mode is entered The maintenance item is selected Maintenance mode is exited Repeat the same maintenance item Run another maintenance item No No Yes Yes Enter 001 using the cursor up down keys or numeric ke...

Page 96: ...nsors for paper conveying U032 Checking the operation of the clutches U033 Checking the operation of the solenoids U034 Adjusting the print start timing LSU Out Top 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSU Out Left 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSU Out Top B W 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSU Out Top 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper 330 210 U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors U039 Adju...

Page 97: ...g fan mode Fan Mode Mode1 Cooling Mode 0 Optical U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp U063 Adjusting the shading position 0 U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification 0 0 U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge regis tration 0 0 U067 Adjusting the scanner center line 0 0 U068 Adjusting the scanning position for origi nals from the DP 0 0 U070 Adjusting the DP magnification 0 0 0 U071 Adj...

Page 98: ...01 Setting the voltage for the primary transfer Normal Full 114 118 126 131 Normal Half 101 103 108 110 Normal 3 4 158 Add Color 2 2 5 Add Color 2nd 2 3 3 14 Surround Correct On U106 Setting the voltage for the secondary trans fer Light Normal 1st 125 118 110 131 123 115 143 134 120 150 139 128 Light Normal 2nd 167 133 112 180 140 116 207 155 124 220 163 128 Light Normal 1st 3 4 Gloss 120 114 111 ...

Page 99: ...0 20 20 20 Output B W 20 20 20 20 Timing U110 Checking the drum count U111 Checking the drum drive time U117 Checking the drum number U118 Displaying the drum history U119 Setting the drum U122 Checking the transfer belt unit number U123 Displaying the transfer belt unit history U127 Checking clearing the transfer count U128 Setting transfer high voltage timing 0 0 20 0 0 16 0 0 13 0 0 10 Develope...

Page 100: ... operation Mode Mode1 Upper Limit 2 0 Minimum 10 Interval Number 250 100 50 U148 Setting drum refresh mode 2 U155 Checking sensors for toner Supply 512 512 512 512 Empty 100 100 100 100 U156 Setting the toner replenishment level U157 Checking the developer drive time U158 Checking the developer count Fuser U161 Setting the fuser control temperature Warm Up 155 110 40 165 155 150 50 120 160 110 40 ...

Page 101: ... size for the side deck Letter Inch A4 Metric U211 Setting the presence or absence of the job separator Off U221 Setting the USB host lock function Off U222 Setting the IC card type Other U223 Operation panel lock Unlock U224 Panel sheet extension U234 Setting punch destination Inch Inch Europe Metric Metric U237 Setting finisher stack quantity 0 0 U240 Checking the operation of the finisher U241 ...

Page 102: ...ing indication On 8 U327 Setting the cassette heater control Off U332 Setting the size conversion factor Rate 1 0 Mode 0 Level 1 1 0 Level 2 2 5 U340 Setting the applied mode 0 0 U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function U343 Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Off U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indi cation 0 Image processing U402 Adjusting margins of image...

Page 103: ...910 790 320 320 300 350 890 910 910 760 320 320 300 350 Print Rate B W 50 Calib U465 Data reference for ID correction U467 Setting the color registration adjustment Color Regist On Timing 10 U468 Checking the color registration data U469 Adjusting the color registration U474 Checking LSU cleaning operation 1000 U485 Setting the image processing mode 1 0 U486 Setting color black and white operation...

Page 104: ...only U928 Checking machine life counts U930 Checking clearing the charger roller count U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP 0 0 0 U952 Maintenance mode workflow U964 Checking of log U969 Checking of toner area code U977 Data capture mode U984 Checking the developer unit number U985 Displaying the developer unit history U989 HDD Scan disk U990 Checking the time for the exposure lamp to li...

Page 105: ...thod 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be output using the cursor up down keys 3 Press the start key A list is output 4 Press the start key The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output When A4 Letter paper is available a report of this size is output If not specify the paper feed location The output status is displayed Display Output list Maintenance List of the current settin...

Page 106: ...ain power switch on 4 Enter the maintenance item 5 Press the start key 6 Select the item to be send 7 Select Text or HTML 8 Press the start key Output will be sent to the USB memory Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Output list Print Outputs the report USB Text Sends output data to the USB memory text type USB HTML...

Page 107: ...30 40 50 999 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Count 9999999 8888888 7777777 6666666 5555555 4444444 3333333 2222222 1111111 999999 888888 777777 666666 555555 444444 1 Event Descriprions 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 0501 01 08 01 01 4002 01 08 01 01 050...

Page 108: ...b Detail of paper source Hexadecimal 00 MP tray 01 Cassette 1 02 Cassette 2 03 Cassette 3 paper feeder large capacity feeder 04 Cassette 4 paper feeder large capacity feeder 05 Cassette 5 side multi tray side deck 06 Cassette 6 side paper feeder side large capacity feeder 07 Cassette 7 side paper feeder side large capacity feeder 08 to 09 Reserved c Detail of paper size Hexadecimal 00 Not specifie...

Page 109: ...adecimal 01 Face down FD 02 Face up FU 1000 sheet finisher face up FU 4000 sheet finisher left sub tray FU 03 1000 sheet finisher face down FD 4000 sheet finisher main tray FD 05 Job separator tray 06 4000 sheet finisher right sub tray FU 07 4000 sheet finisher left sub tray FD 09 4000 sheet finisher right sub tray FD 0A Center folding unit tray 0B Mailbox tray 1 FD 0C Mailbox tray 1 FU 15 Mailbox...

Page 110: ...of replace ment are logged The total page count at the time of the replacement of the toner container Code of maintenance replacing item 1 byte 2 categories First byte Replacing item 01 Toner container Second byte Type of replacing item 00 Black 01 Cyan 02 Magenta 03 Yellow First byte Replacing item 02 Maintenance kit Second byte Type of replacing item 01 MK 8305A 8505A 02 MK 8305B 8505B 03 MK 830...

Page 111: ...epending on location Refer to Paper Jam Log All instances includ ing those are not occurred are dis played Indicates the log counter of self diag nostics errors depending on cause Example C6000 4 Self diagnostics error 6000 has hap pened four times Indicates the log coun ter depending on the maintenance item for maintenance T Toner container 00 Black 01 Cyan 02 Magenta 03 Yellow M Maintenance kit ...

Page 112: ...nstalled Installed Installed Installed Installed Connected US English FAX Information Slot1 Slot2 Rings Normal Rings FAX TEL Rings TAD Option DIMM Size 3 3 3 16 MB Print Coverage Average Total K 1 10 C 2 20 M 3 30 Y 4 40 Copy K 1 10 C 2 20 M 3 30 Y 4 40 Printer K 1 10 C 2 20 M 3 30 Y 4 40 FAX K 1 10 Period Last Page K C M Y Usage Page A4 Letter Conversion 1111111 11 2222222 22 3333333 33 4444444 4...

Page 113: ...000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 00000...

Page 114: ... job separator Installed Not Installed 15 Presence or absence of the printed document guard kit Installed Not Installed 16 Presence or absence of the IC card authentication kit Installed Not Installed Trial 17 Presence or absence of the internet fax kit Installed Not Installed 18 Presence or absence of the data security kit Installed Not Installed 19 Presence or absence of the UG 34 Installed Not ...

Page 115: ...software version and the date of the previous update 38 RP code Code the main software version and the date of the previous update 39 NV RAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225 a b c d e f a Consistency of the present software version and the database _ underscore OK Asterisk NG b Database version c The oldest time stamp of database version d Consistency of the present software version and the ME firmwa...

Page 116: ...Maintenance kit A Maintenance kit B Maintenance kit C 50 Panel lock information 0 Off 1 Partial lock 2 Full lock 51 USB information U00 Not installed U01 Full speed U02 Hi speed 52 Paper handling information 0 Paper source unit select 1 Paper source unit 53 Color printing double count mode 0 All single counts 1 A3 Single count Less than 420 mm length 2 Legal Single count 356 mm or less length 3 Fo...

Page 117: ...mation 71 Calibration information 72 Calibration information 73 Calibration information 74 Calibration information 75 RFID information 76 RFID reader writer version infor mation 77 Color table version for printer 78 Color table 2 version for printer 79 Color table version for copy 80 Color table 2 version for copy 81 Maintenance information 82 Altitude 0 Standard 1 High altitude 1 2 High altitude ...

Page 118: ... the start key 2 Select Mode1 All 3 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the home position 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item U002 Error codes Item No Descr...

Page 119: ... machine number Purpose To check or set the machine number Method 1 Press the start key If the machine serial number of engine PWB matches with that of main PWB If the machine serial number of engine PWB does not match with that of main PWB Setting Carry out if the machine serial number does not match 1 Select Execute 2 Press the start key Writing of serial No starts 3 Turn the main power switch o...

Page 120: ...d are mandatory to contain 3 Select New ID Reconfirm 4 Enter a new 8 digit ID on ten keys 0 9 5 Press the start key The setting is set Method Initialize 1 Select Initialize 2 Press the start key ID is initialized Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description New ID Enter a new 8 digit ID New ID Reconfirm Enter a ne...

Page 121: ...anner booting RFID RFID ROM IH CPU IH CPU ROM IH CPU Boot IH CPU booting Motor CPU Motor CPU ROM Motor CPU Boot Motor CPU booting Dictionary Option Language Optional language ROM PDF1 7 Resource PDF1 7 resource ROM Solution Framework Framework ROM FMU FMU ROM Weekly Timer Weekly Timer ROM Color Table1 Copy Color table 1 copy ROM Color Table2 Copy Color table 2 copy ROM Color Table1 Prn Color table...

Page 122: ... capacity feeder ROM PF2 Boot Side paper feeder Side large capacity feeder booting DF 1000 sheet finisher 4000 sheet finisher ROM DF Boot 1000 sheet finisher 4000 sheet finisher booting PH Punch unit ROM PH Boot Punch unit booting MT Mailbox ROM MT Boot Mailbox booting BF Center folding unit ROM BF Boot Center folding unit booting Fax APL1 Fax APL 1 Fax Boot1 Fax booting 1 Fax IPL1 Fax IPL 1 Fax A...

Page 123: ...Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initialized based on the destination setting 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and e...

Page 124: ... address book one touch keys and doc ument box etc shortcuts and panel programs When fully formatted the following pre installed software are removed Option language PDF1 7 resource FMU weekly timer Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item 3 Press Execute 4 Press the start key to initialize the hard disk 5 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Ite...

Page 125: ...DEVM K is turned on DLP CMY Developer motor MCY DEVM MCY is turned on Fuser Fuser motor FUM is turned on SB CW Eject motor EM is turned on clockwise SB CCW Eject motor EM is turned on counterclockwise CMY Release Color release motor CRM is turned on Job Separator JS eject motor JSEM is turned on Regist Registration motor RM is turned on Bridge1 Bridge conveying motor 1 BRCM1 is turned on Bridge2 B...

Page 126: ...tion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description MPT Jam MP feed sensor MPFS Cassette1 Feed Feed sensor 1 FS1 Cassette2 Feed Feed sensor 2 FS2 Feed2 Feed B Paper conveying sensor PCS Regist Registration sensor RS Belt Jam Transfer belt sensor TRBLS Exit Feed Fuser eject sensor FUES DU1 Duplex sensor 1 DUS1 DU2 Duplex sensor...

Page 127: ...creen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Feed1 Paper feed clutch 1 PFCL1 is turned on Feed2 Paper feed clutch 2 PFCL2 is turned on Mid Roller 1 Middle clutch MCL is turned on MPT Feed MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL is turned on Regist 1 Registration clutch RCL is turned on Feed Paper conveying clutch PCCL is turned on DU1 1 Duplex clutch 1 DUCL1 i...

Page 128: ...tween the leading edges of the copy image and original Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted 55 ppm model only Item No Description Display Description Branch Exit Feedshift solenoid FSSOL is turned on Pick Up1 Pickup solenoid 1 2 PUSOL1 2 is turned on Job Separator JS fee...

Page 129: ... 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm Cassette Half L Paper feed from cassette 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm Duplex L Duplex mode second 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm Duplex Half L Duplex mode second 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm MPT S Paper feed from MP tray 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm MPT Half S Paper feed from MP tray 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm Cassette S Paper feed from cassette 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm Cassette Half S Paper feed from cassette 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 ...

Page 130: ... 3 Press the system menu key 4 Select the item to be adjusted 45 ppm 55 ppm model only Item No Description Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 Leading edge registration 20 1 0 mm U034 U066 P 1 3 54 U071 P 1 3 59 Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step MPT Paper feed from MP tray 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm Cassette1 Paper feed from cassette 1 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1...

Page 131: ...e start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Center line of printing within 2 0 mm Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 U034 U067 P 1 3 55 U072 P 1 3 61 ...

Page 132: ...paper by setting the actual printing area for folio paper Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting value using the keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Length Length 330 to 356 mm 330 Width Width...

Page 133: ... motor 1and 2 EXFM1 2 is turned on A LSU Cooling LSU fan motor LSUFM is turned on B Belt Cooling Belt fan motor 1and 2 BLFM1 2 is turned on A Exit Cooling Eject front fan motor EFFM is turned on B Toner Toner fan motor 1and 2 TFM1 2 is turned on A Low Volt Power source fan motor PSFM is turned on A Exit Rear Cooling Eject rear fan motor EFRM is turned on B IH PWB IH fan motor IHFM is turned on A I...

Page 134: ...ress the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Adjustment Sub Scan 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys Increasing the setting makes the image longer and decreasing it makes the image shorter Figure 1 3 6 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description U039 U065 P 1 3...

Page 135: ... Display Description Paper Loop Amount Deflection adjustment Paper Loop Amount B W Deflection adjustment in black and white mode Paper Loop Amount 3 4 Deflection adjustment at 3 4 times of line speed Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm MPT L Paper feed from MP tray 30 to 20 1 1 5 7 MPT Half L Paper feed from MP tray 30 to 20 1 1 0 1 Cassette L Paper feed from ...

Page 136: ... indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm MPT L Paper feed from MP tray 30 to 20 1 1 5 8 Cassette L Paper feed from cassette 30 to 20 1 1 5 8 Duplex L Duplex mode second 30 to 20 2 2 5 8 MPT S Paper feed from MP tray 30 to 20 1 1 5 8 Cassette S Paper feed from cassette 30 to 20 1 1 5 8 Duple...

Page 137: ...ing is set Setting Set Loop Sensor Valid 1 Select On or Off Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description Display Description Set Loop Sensor Enter the data value for loop sensor Loop Sensor Control Set the loop sensor detection control Set Loop Sensor Valid Sets the presence ...

Page 138: ...r cleaning motor speeds in black white mode Moter6 Adjustment of eject motor fuser motor bridge conveying motor 1 2 paper feed motor JS eject motor middle motor and duplex motor 1 2 speeds in black white mode Moter1 Half Adjustment of drum motor K speeds in half speed Moter2 Half Adjustment of developer motor K developer motor MCY transfer motor registration motor and transfer cleaning motor speed...

Page 139: ...tion motor RM 5000 to 5000 0 Belt Clean Transfer cleaning motor TRCM 5000 to 5000 0 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm SB Eject motor EM 5000 to 5000 51 44 34 30 Fixing Fuser motor FUM 5000 to 5000 0 0 0 0 Bridge1 Bridge conveying motor 1 BRCM1 5000 to 5000 77 66 51 46 Bridge2 Bridge conveying motor 2 BRCM2 5000 to 5000 77 66 51 41 Feed Paper feed motor PFM 5...

Page 140: ...00 0 Regist B W Registration motor RM in black white mode 5000 to 5000 0 Belt Clean B W Transfer cleaning motor TRCM in black white mode 5000 to 5000 0 Display Description Setting range Initial setting SB B W Eject motor EM in black white mode 5000 to 5000 27 Fixing B W Fuser motor FUM in black white mode 5000 to 5000 0 Bridge1 B W Bridge conveying motor 1 BRCM1 in black white mode 5000 to 5000 41...

Page 141: ... to 5000 0 Regist Registration motor RM in half speed 5000 to 5000 0 Belt Clean Transfer cleaning motor TRCM in half speed 5000 to 5000 0 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm SB Eject motor EM in half speed 5000 to 5000 102 87 67 60 Fixing Fuser motor FUM in half speed 5000 to 5000 0 0 0 0 Bridge1 Bridge conveying motor 1 BRCM1 in half speed 5000 to 5000 107 92...

Page 142: ...f line speed 5000 to 5000 0 Regist Registration motor RM at 3 4 times of line speed 5000 to 5000 0 Belt Clean Transfer cleaning motor TRCM at 3 4 times of line speed 5000 to 5000 0 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm SB Eject motor EM at 3 4 times of line speed 5000 to 5000 0 60 44 44 Fixing Fuser motor FUM at 3 4 times of line speed 5000 to 5000 0 0 0 0 Bridg...

Page 143: ... indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm DU1 Duplex motor 1 DUM1 at 3 4 times of line speed 5000 to 5000 65 65 DU2 Duplex motor 2 DUM2 at 3 4 times of line speed 5000 to 5000 65 65 ...

Page 144: ...n for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description Display Description Fan Mode Sets temperature at which paper conveying fan motors operate Cooling Mode Sets temperature at which the paper conveying fan motors are switched for controlling Display Description Mode1 Temperature at which paper conveying fan motors operate High Mode2 Temperature at which paper conveying fan motors oper...

Page 145: ...he shading posi tion should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys Increasing the value moves the shading position toward the machine left and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine right 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this main...

Page 146: ...tart key 2 Press the system menu key 3 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Select the item to be adjusted Adjustment Main Scan 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 8 2 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description U039 P 1 3 ...

Page 147: ... or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 9 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 ...

Page 148: ... copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 10 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the leading edge registration proceed with the follow ing maintenance modes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Init...

Page 149: ... keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 11 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line proceed with the following mainte nance modes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting...

Page 150: ...he left when the setting value is decreased 4 Press the start key The value is set 5 Select Black Line 6 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 7 Press the start key The value is set 8 Set the original the one which density is known in the DP and press the system menu key 9 Press the start key Test copy is executed 10 Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting valu...

Page 151: ...d DP only 2 Dual scan DP only Adjustment Sub Scan 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 12 2 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Sub Scan F Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction of CCD ...

Page 152: ...example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 13 2 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the magnification perform the following maintenance modes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 U039 P 1 3 40 U070 ...

Page 153: ...cription Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Front Head Leading edge registration of CCD first side 32 to 32 0 0 174 mm Front Tail Trailing edge registration of CCD first side 32 to 32 0 0 174 mm Back Head Leading edge registration of CCD second side 32 to 32 0 0 174 mm Back Tail Trailing edge registration of CCD second side 32 to 32 0 0 174 mm Display Description Setting range ...

Page 154: ...edge registration proceed with the follow ing maintenance modes Adjustment Trailing edge registration 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 15 2 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the first side is adjusted check the second side and if adjustment is required carry out the adjustm...

Page 155: ...le 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Figure 1 3 16 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the first side is adjusted check the second side and if adjustment is required carry out the adjustment If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line proceed with the following mainte nance modes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenan...

Page 156: ...t 5 Select Execute 6 Press the start key Scanning starts under the selected conditions 7 To stop operation press the stop key Item No Description Display Description Scanner Motor Scanner operation Home Position Home position operation Dust Check Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on DP Reading DP scanning position operation Display Operating conditions Setting range Zoom Magnification 25 to ...

Page 157: ...k 1 Select Dust Check 2 Press the start key The exposure lamp lights 3 To turn the exposure lamp off press the stop key Method DP Reading 1 Select DP Reading 2 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position Completion Press the stop key when scanning stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played Item No Description ...

Page 158: ...etting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Settings 0 No correction 1 Slight correction 2 Medium correction 3 Strong correction 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop ke...

Page 159: ...ned are modified when System Menu Adjustment Maintenance Correcting Black Line is set to Off Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Setting CCD 1 Select the item to be set 2 Change the value using the or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set Method Black Line 1 Select Clear 2 Press the start key The setting is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for sel...

Page 160: ...r selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Purpose 256Gradation 256 gradation PG To check the gradation reproducibility Color Belt Four color belts PG To check the developer state and the engine section ID Gray C Cyan PG To check the drum quality Gray M Magenta PG To check the drum quality Gray Y Yellow PG To check the drum quality Gray K Black PG To che...

Page 161: ...f vertical black lines appear on the gray band and vertical white lines appear in the black band in the same position clean the CIS roller and the CIS glass and then repeat white line correction If vertical black lines or vertical white lines appear on both sheets white line correction has been completed normally However the cause of the vertical lines lies in the engine and thus the engine must b...

Page 162: ... are frequently mal detected in size after scanning a wholly dark document or a document enclosed with dark objects on edges Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Item No Description blank sheet black band Causes Corrective measures No lines No lines Complete Black lines White lines Dirty CIS roller or CIS glass Clean CIS roller or CIS glass and then perform U091 again Black lines No line...

Page 163: ...dth size for color R Original Area G Detected original width size for color G Original Area B Detected original width size for color B Original Area Detected original width size Size SW L Displays the original size sensor OSS ON OFF Display Description Setting range Initial setting Original R1 Original threshold value for color R near side 0 to 255 20 50 Original R2 Original threshold value for co...

Page 164: ...etting Set AC Auto Adj 1 Select On or Off Initial setting On 2 Press the start key The setting is set Item No Description Display Description Adj AC Bias Main charger AC bias for each color Set AC Auto Adj Setting the AC bias auto adjustment Set DC Bias Main charger DC bias for each color Adj DC Bias Additional surface potential Set Low Temp Pre charge time at power supply ON Set Charger Freq Sett...

Page 165: ...charger DC bias for yellow half speed DC1 Bias K Main charger DC bias for black full speed DC1 Bias Half K Main charger DC bias for black half speed DC1 Bias B W K Main charger DC bias for black in black white mode Display Description Setting range Initial setting DC2 Bias C Main charger DC bias for cyan full speed 128 to 127 0 DC2 Bias Half C Main charger DC bias for cyan half speed 128 to 127 0 ...

Page 166: ...e system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Generally Main charger frequency 7500 to 11280 10442 8857 8807 11022 B W Main charger frequency in black white mode 7500 to 11280 10690 Half Main charger frequency in half speed 7500 to 11280 10690 10690 10690 ...

Page 167: ...No Description Display Description Normal Setting the primary transfer positive voltage Add Color Setting the addition value Add Color 2nd Setting the addition value for the second side Surround Correct Environmental correction ON OFF setting Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Full Primary transfer positive volt age for yellow full speed 0 to 255 114 118 126 ...

Page 168: ...available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting C Addition value for the second side cyan 127 to 127 2 M Addition value for the second side magenta 127 to 127 3 Y Addition value for the second side yel...

Page 169: ...ransfer bias on paper with thickness 75 g m2 to 105 g m2 Heavy1 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness 106 g m2 to 135 g m2 Heavy2 5 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness 136 g m2 to 300 g m2 OHP Control voltage for the transfer bias for transparencies Bias Transfer bias value Display Description 1st Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first...

Page 170: ...16 124 128 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Width 105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 120 120 131 131 Width 210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 114 114 123 123 Width 297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 111 111 120 120 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Width 105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 155 155 180 180 Width 210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 126 126 140 140 Width ...

Page 171: ...ltage for the transfer bias for the first side in black white mode 2nd B W Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side in black white mode Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Width 105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 125 131 143 150 Width 210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 118 123 134 139 Width 297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 110 115 120 128 Display Description Setting rang...

Page 172: ...itial setting 55ppm Width 105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 150 Width 210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 144 Width 297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 128 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 55ppm Width 105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 183 Width 210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 171 Width 297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 128 Display Description 1st 3 4 Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3 4 times of line speed 2n...

Page 173: ... Display Description 1st Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side half speed 2nd Half Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side half speed Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Width 105 105 mm wide 0 to 255 114 118 126 130 Width 210 210 mm wide 0 to 255 111 115 123 127 Width 297 297 mm wide 0 to 255 109 112 119 122 Display D...

Page 174: ...e item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Reverse Transfer reverse bias full speed 0 to 255 163 1 1 1 Reverse Half Transfer reverse bias half speed 0 to 255 163 1 1 1 Reverse 3 4 Transfer reverse bias at 3 4 times of line speed 0 to 255 1 1 1 1 Reverse B W Transfer reverse bias in black white mode 0 to 255 1 Cleaning Cleani...

Page 175: ...ressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Belt A Transfer belt cleaning voltage printing Belt B Transfer belt cleaning voltage paper interval Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Full Full speed 0 to 255 187 192 202 207 Half Half speed 0 to 255 17...

Page 176: ...aration shift bias output in black white mode Timing Adjusting the ON OFF timing with paper position Display Description Setting range Initial setting Light 1st Separation shift bias for the first side on paper with thickness 52 to 59 g m2 0 to 255 20 Light 2nd Separation shift bias for the second side on paper with thickness 52 to 59 g m2 0 to 255 20 Normal 1st Separation shift bias for the first...

Page 177: ...ht 1st Separation shift bias for the first side on paper with thickness 52 to 59 g m2 0 to 255 20 Light 2nd Separation shift bias for the second side on paper with thickness 52 to 59 g m2 0 to 255 20 Normal 1st Separation shift bias for the first side on paper with thickness 60 to 75 g m2 0 to 255 20 Normal 2nd Separation shift bias for the second side on paper with thickness 60 to 75 g m2 0 to 25...

Page 178: ...r checking a figure which is used as a reference when correcting the high voltage based on time Purpose To check the drum status Method 1 Press the start key The drum drive time is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description C Drum count value for cyan M Drum count value for magenta Y Drum count value f...

Page 179: ...and the drum counter Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the color to check The history of a machine number and a drum counter for each color is displayed by three cases Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description C Cyan drum number M Magenta drum number Y Yellow drum number K Black drum number Display Descript...

Page 180: ...nced 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On U122 Checking the transfer belt unit number Description Displays the number of the transfer belt unit for checking Purpose To check the number of the transfer belt Method 1 Press the start key The current number of the transfer belt is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a mainten...

Page 181: ...rive time after replacement of the transfer belt unit or transfer roller Also to clear the counts after replacing transfer roller Method 1 Press the start key The current counts of the transfer counter is displayed Clearing 1 Select Clear 2 Press the start key The counter value is cleared Clears only the transfer roller The transfer belt unit is not cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen...

Page 182: ...er that has been installed Purpose To operate when installing the machine or replacing the developer unit Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key Toner installation is started and the control value of the toner sensor is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting ran...

Page 183: ...r control voltage auto adjustment Mode Switching the manual adjustment and auto adjustment Display Description Setting range Initial setting Control C Toner sensor C control voltage 0 to 255 150 Control M Toner sensor M control voltage 0 to 255 150 Control Y Toner sensor Y control voltage 0 to 255 150 Control K Toner sensor K control voltage 0 to 255 150 Display Description Default C Reference val...

Page 184: ... replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment Auto Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment Display Description Supply C Toner feed sta...

Page 185: ...of toner near end to toner empty Purpose To change the setting to advance detection of near end if the interval from toner near end to toner empty seems too short Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the value using the or numeric keys Increasing the setting makes the interval from toner near end to toner empty longer Decreasing the setting makes the interval from ton...

Page 186: ...Ext Int Internal External temperature C External humidity LSU Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit C Developing Internal temperature around the developer section C Display Description External Temp External temperature C External Humidity External humidity Internal Temp Internal temperature C Display Description C Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit C C M Internal temp...

Page 187: ...veloper sleeve roller AC bias Mag DC Developer magnet roller DC bias Mag AC Developer magnet roller AC bias Sleeve Freq Developer sleeve roller frequency Sleeve Duty Developer sleeve roller duty Mag Duty Developer magnet roller duty AC Calib Executing or setting the AC calibration Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm C Developer sleeve roller DC bias for cyan 0...

Page 188: ...55 155 M Developer sleeve roller AC bias for magenta 0 to 255 175 175 155 155 Y Developer sleeve roller AC bias for yellow 0 to 255 175 175 155 155 K Developer sleeve roller AC bias for black 0 to 255 175 175 155 155 B W Developer sleeve roller AC bias in black white mode 0 to 255 155 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm C Developer magnet roller DC bias for cy...

Page 189: ...101 160 160 M Developer magnet roller AC bias for magenta 0 to 255 101 101 200 200 Y Developer magnet roller AC bias for yellow 0 to 255 101 101 200 200 K Developer magnet roller AC bias for black 0 to 255 101 101 200 200 B W Developer magnet roller AC bias in black white mode 0 to 255 160 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Normal Developer sleeve roller fre ...

Page 190: ...is set Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Normal Developer magnet roller duty 0 to 99 37 37 68 68 B W Developer magnet roller duty in black white mode 0 to 99 68 Display Description Calibration Executing the AC calibration Magnification AC calibration target bias value setting High Altitude Mode setting for AC calibration bias control Disp...

Page 191: ...selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Mode1 Execute AC calibration by normal bias control Mode2 If print density is low in an installation at high altitude execute calibration by fixing the bias potential Display Description High Altitude Mode setting for AC calibration bias control Display Description Display Description Default Initial setting 3000m...

Page 192: ...value is set Setting Minimum 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Mode Settings for toner applying operation Upper Limit Upper limit printing ratio of toner applying quantity with each mode Minimum Toner layer width when cleaning mode is selected Interval Number Toner collection operational interval...

Page 193: ...shing is too frequently executed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the mode 0 Off 1 Short 2 Standard 3 Long 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Print Normal During continuous printing Normal environ ment 10 to 500 250 Print H H Du...

Page 194: ...ing a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Waste Toner Control voltage value of the waste toner sensor Toner Control voltage value and replenishment level of toner sensor each color Display Description Full Waste toner sensor 1 WTS1 Near Full Waste toner sensor 2 WTS2 Display Description Sensor C Toner sensor C output value Sensor M Toner sensor M output value S...

Page 195: ...the image lighter decreasing it makes the image darker 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Supply Setting the toner replenishment level Empty Setting the toner empty level Display Description Setting range Initial setting C Toner replenishment level for cyan 0 to 900...

Page 196: ...yed U158 Checking the developer count Description Displays the developer count for checking Purpose To check the developer unit status Method 1 Press the start key The current developer counts is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description C Developer drive time for cyan M Developer drive time for magen...

Page 197: ...printing Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Ready Center Control temperature at dis playing Ready Center 130 to 200 C 155 160 165 170 Ready Edge Control temperature at dis playing Ready Edge 100 to 200 C 110 110 140 145 Ready Press Control temperature at dis playing Ready Press 0 to 200 C 40 40 80 80 Drive Center Stable temperature during driving Center 130 t...

Page 198: ...oblem in the fuser section Purpose To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press Execute 3 Press the start key The fuser problem data is initialized 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Full Speed Print...

Page 199: ...ng the fuser power source Description Displays and settings the specification of fuser power supply for checking Purpose To check or set the specification of fuser power supply after replacement of the fuser unit Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the mode 1 100 V specifications 2 200 V specifications 3 120 V specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key ...

Page 200: ... the operation panel on Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key All the LEDs on the operation panel light 4 Press the stop key The LEDs turns off Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Heat Roller Edge1 Heat roller edge...

Page 201: ...ess three keys displayed in order The touch panel is adjusted automatically 3 Press the indicated three keys and then check the display 4 Press the stop key Method Check 1 Press the start key 2 Press the indicated three keys and then check the display When adjusting the display press Initialize to execute the adjustment automatically 3 Press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen fo...

Page 202: ...the host initiated 7 The result of communication will be displayed Refer to the result Method Call Service End 1 Select Execute 2 Press the start key Communication with the host initiated 3 The result of communication will be displayed Refer to the result Result table Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description I...

Page 203: ...ss the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Normal Speed Normal reading 600 dpi High Speed High speed reading Display Description CCD ADP Non P Without paper single sided original of CCD continuous operation CCD ADP With paper single sided original of CCD CCD RADP Non P Without paper double sided ...

Page 204: ...ds between Off and On Setting MESSAGE 1 Select the Key Device or Coin Vender 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Supplement Two or more Key cards key counters and coin venders cannot be installed simultaneously Therefore if any of these options are chosen coin vender settings U206 will be automatically cancel...

Page 205: ...urn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Setting No Coin Action 1 Select the item Initial setting Off 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item No Description Display Description On Off Config Sets the presence or absence of the coin vender No Coin Action Behavior when ...

Page 206: ...eration panel lights 3 As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1 When all the keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right the top LED in that line will light 4 When all the keys on the operatio...

Page 207: ...he main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On U211 Setting the presence or absence of the job separator Description Sets the presence or absence of the inner job separator Purpose To run this maintenance item if the inner job separator is installed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Inner Job Separator 3 Select On or Off Initial setting Off 4 Press the start key T...

Page 208: ...ting is set 5 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On U222 Setting the IC card type Description Sets the type of IC card Purpose To change the type of IC card Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Initial setting Other 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is display...

Page 209: ...s displayed Item No Description Display Description Unlock Release the lock of the operation from the system menu Partial Lock Lock the operation from the system menu Lock Lock the operation from the system menu and job cancel Item Partial Lock Lock Entering maintenance mode Prohibited Prohibited Entering system menu Prohibited Prohibited Transmission transmission from document boxes Prohibited Pr...

Page 210: ...re installed graphics file is displayed at a service call How to change the message Entering 562 4 letters using the numeric keypad during a service call display will let service call messages 1 and 2 How to reset the message display Reverting the maintenance mode will automatically reset the message to the previous Caution The graphics file for start display must be opaque To avoid the background...

Page 211: ... 1 Press the start key 2 Select the destination Initial setting Inch Inch specifications Europe Metric Metric specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item No Description Display Description Auto Conforms to destination settings Japan Metric Metric Japan specifications Inch Inch North America specif...

Page 212: ... Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys Initial setting 0 Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for non staple copying 10 sheets 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On Item No Description Display Description Main Tray Number of sheets of stack on the main tray Middle Tray Number of sheets of ...

Page 213: ...ned on at low speed Middle H DF middle motor DFMM is turned on at high speed Middle L DF middle motor DFMM is turned on at low speed Eject H DF eject motor DFEM is turned on at high speed Eject L DF eject motor DFEM is turned on at low speed Save H DF drum motor DFDRM is turned on at high speed Save L DF drum motor DFDRM is turned on at low speed Tray DF tray motor DFTM is turned on Staple Move DF...

Page 214: ...y DF feedshift solenoid DFFSSOL is turned on Save Drum DF drum solenoid DFDRSOL is turned on Booklet DF center fold solenoid DFCFSOL is turned on Punch Punch solenoid PUSOL is turned on Three Fold CF feedshift solenoid CFFSSOL is turned on Display Description Conv Mailbox drive motor MBDM is turned on at paper conveying Branch Mailbox drive motor MBDM is turned on at feedshift operation Display De...

Page 215: ...switch and sensor of the mailbox Booklet Checking the switch and sensor of the center folding unit Punch Checking the switch and sensor of the punch unit Display Description Front Cover DF front cover switch DFFCSW MPT DF eject cover switch DFECSW Top Cover DF top cover switch DFTCSW Tray U Limit DF tray sensor 1 DFTS1 Tray HP2 DF tray sensor 2 DFTS2 Tray Middle DF tray sensor 3 DFTS3 Tray L Limit...

Page 216: ...1 Shift Tail HP DF shift sensor 2 DFSFS2 Shift Unlock HP DF shift release sensor DFSFRS Sub Tray Full DF sub tray full sensor DFSTFS Shift Set DF shift set sensor DFSFSS Display Description Eject MB eject sensor MBES Cover MB cover open close switch MBCOCSW Over Flow1 MB overflow sensor 1 MBOFS1 Over Flow2 MB overflow sensor 2 MBOFS2 Over Flow3 MB overflow sensor 3 MBOFS3 Over Flow4 MB overflow se...

Page 217: ... CFPES Eject CF eject sensor CFES Paper CF paper sensor CFPS Tray Full CF tray full sensor CFTFS Bundle Up HP CF adjustment sensor 1 CFADS1 Bundle Down HP CF adjustment sensor 2 CFADS2 Width Up HP CF side registration sensor 1 CFSRS1 Width Down HP CF side registration sensor 2 CFSRS2 Blade HP CF blade sensor CFBLS Tray CF tray switch CFTSW Set CF set switch CFSSW Left Guide CF left guide switch CF...

Page 218: ...on stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played Item No Description Display Description Feed Motor DP original feed motor DPOFM is turned on Conv Motor DP original conveying motor DPOCM is turned on Rev Motor 1 DP switchback motor DPSBM is turned on Lift Motor DP lift motor DPLM is turned on Rev Press Sol 1 DP pressure solenoid DPPSOL is turned on Rev Branch Sol 1 DP feedshif...

Page 219: ...n reverse 1 Reversed DP only 2 Dual scan DP only Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Feed DP feed sensor DPFS Regist 1 DP registration sensor DPRS Timing DP timing sensor DPTS CIS Head 2 DP CIS sensor DPCS Tray 1 DP switchback sensor DPSBS Set DP original sensor DPOS Longitudinal DP original length switch...

Page 220: ... Method 1 Press the start key 2 Change the message using the cursor up down keys When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed the message corresponding the specified number is displayed 3 Change the language using the keys Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description ...

Page 221: ...ides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the side registration guides to paper Adjustment of booklet stapling position Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper Adjustment of center folding position Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper Adjustment of tri folding position A...

Page 222: ...g the keys or numeric keys If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A increase the setting value If the distance is larger than the value A decrease the setting value Figure 1 3 19 3 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of registration stop timing 20 to 20 0 ...

Page 223: ...epeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position Setting Shift Front HP Shift Tail HP 1 Select Shift Front HP or Shift Tail HP 2 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 5 Enter maintenance mode U240 and select Motor then Sort Test 6 Repeat the above ...

Page 224: ... Adjustment of front and back stapling home position 15 to 15 0 0 19 mm Sample 2 Sample 1 Display Description Width Up HP Adjustment of upper side registration home position Width Down HP Adjustment of lower side registration home position Staple Pos1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4 Letter size Staple Pos2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4 Legal size Staple Pos3 Adjustm...

Page 225: ...ple Pos3 2 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys When staples are placed too far right sample 1 decrease the preset value When staples are placed too far left sample 2 increase the preset value Reference value within 2 mm Figure 1 3 22 3 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of upper ...

Page 226: ... too far right sample 1 increase the preset value When the tri fold position too far left sample 2 decrease the setting value Reference value A 7 0 2 mm Figure 1 3 24 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Adjustment of cen...

Page 227: ...splay Description 2PF Paper feeder LCF Large capacity feeder Side Deck Side deck SMT Side multi tray Side 2PF Side paper feeder Side LCF Side large capacity feeder Display Description Motor Off PF paper feed motor PFPFM is turned off On PF paper feed motor PFPFM is turned on Device C1 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 1 PFPCCL1 is turned on C2 Clutch PF paper conveying clutch 2 PFPCCL2 is turned on...

Page 228: ...ying clutch 3 PFPCCL3 is turned on H Feed1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 is turned on H Feed2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 is turned on Cassette1 Solenoid PF pickup solenoid 1 PFPUSOL1 is turned on Cassette2 Solenoid PF pickup solenoid 2 PFPUSOL2 is turned on Display Description Motor Off SF paper feed motor SFPFM is turned off On SF paper feed motor SFPFM is turned on Device C1 C...

Page 229: ...ovides changing the time when the message to acknowledge to conduct maintenance and automatic grayscale adjustment is periodically displayed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description ...

Page 230: ... changed 3 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Clearing 1 Select Clear 2 Press the start key The setting value is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range M Cnt A Count value for maintenance cycle kit A 0 to 9999999 M Cnt B Count value ...

Page 231: ...han 5 seconds between Off and On An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item U252 Error codes Item No Description Display Description Japan Metric Metric Japan specifications Inch Inch North America specifications Europe Metric Metric Europe specifications Asia Pacific Metric...

Page 232: ...if the setting of U276 Setting the copy count mode is Mode1 3 Select the count system Initial setting DBL A3 Ledger 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Full Color Count system of full color mode Mono Color Count system of single color mode B W Count system of black...

Page 233: ... Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U265 Setting OEM purchaser code Description Sets the OEM purchaser code Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting value using the numeric keys 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 second...

Page 234: ...mode Purpose To change the charging counter which counts up in single color printing Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the mode Initial setting Mode 0 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Banner A Counting for Banner A 470 1mm to 9...

Page 235: ...stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U284 Setting 2 color copy mode Description Sets whether to use 2 color copy mode Purpose According to user request changes the setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select On or Off Initial setting Off If On is selected 2 color copy will be displayed on the color function screen 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completi...

Page 236: ...g Description Specify whether or not a notice is displayed on the operation panel when abnormal temperature and humidity is detected Purpose According to user request changes the setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select On or Off Initial setting On 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Descri...

Page 237: ...the keys or numeric keys If a spotted background appears when printing pages with high print coverage change the setting to 5 However if you prefer to give priority to printing speed change the setting to 4 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Interval Paper interval ...

Page 238: ...Black Line Cnt 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys When setting is 0 the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is detected 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Black Line Mode Black line cleaning guidance ON OFF setti...

Page 239: ...ng according to the machine installation environment Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select On or Off Initial setting Off 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description On Cassette heater ON Off Cassette heater OFF ...

Page 240: ...ial setting 0 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting Coverage L M 1 Select the item 2 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Rate Size coefficient Mode Toggling full color count and color coverage count display...

Page 241: ...and On Supplement The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large Setting Adj Max Job 1 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys The maximum Printer jobs should be maximum jobs maximum copy jobs 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display...

Page 242: ...re cassette can be selected When an optional paper feed device is not installed the corresponding count is not dis played 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Cassette1 Cassette 1 Cassette2 Cassette 2 Cassette3 Cassette 3 paper feeder large capacity feeder Cassette4...

Page 243: ... reached by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance count reaches the set value the message is displayed Purpose To change the time for maintenance due indication Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the keys or numeric keys 3 Pre...

Page 244: ...ey The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins perform the following maintenance modes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Lead Printer leading edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 4 5 0 1 mm A Margin Printer left margin 0 0 to 1...

Page 245: ...tart key The value is set Caution If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins perform the following maintenance modes Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step A Margin Scanner left margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm B Margin Scanner leading edge margin...

Page 246: ... narrower Figure 1 3 27 7 Press the start key The value is set Item No Description Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step A Margin DP left margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm B Margin DP leading edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm C Margin DP right margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm D Margin DP trailing edge margin 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm A Margin Back DP left margin second ...

Page 247: ...adjustment does not optimize the margins perform the following maintenance modes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description U039 P 1 3 40 U034 P 1 3 36 U402 P 1 3 150 U403 P 1 3 151 U404 ...

Page 248: ... 2 Press the system menu key 3 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 4 Press the system menu key 5 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys For copy example 1 decrease the value For copy example 2 increase the value Figure 1 3 28 6 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed It...

Page 249: ...y 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 2 and set them 6 Press the start key Adjustment is made second time 7 Place the output test pattern 3 as the original Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 3 and set them 8 Press the start key Adjustment is made third time 9 When normally completed Finish is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment error code is ...

Page 250: ...start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Table1 Normal color table Table2 Color tables for improving reproduction of characters at black and white printing Table3 More fidelity than Table2 ...

Page 251: ...em U411 3 Select Target 4 Select U425 and press the start key 5 Select Table Chart1 6 Select the item Item No Description Display Description Original to be used for adjustment P N Table Chart1 Automatic adjustment in the scanner sec tion chart 1 7505000005 DP FaceUp Chart1 Do not use Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section first side chart 1 7505000005 DP FaceDown Chart1 Automatic adjustm...

Page 252: ...up 2 Enter maintenance item U411 3 Select Target 4 Select U425 and press the start key 5 Select DP FaceUp Chart1 6 Select Input To manually enter the target value 1 Set a specified original P N 7505000005 on the DP face up 2 Enter maintenance item U411 3 Select Target 4 Select Auto and press the start key 5 Select DP FaceUp Chart1 6 Select Input Item No Description Display Description All Executin...

Page 253: ...ect Target 4 Select U425 and press the start key 5 Select DP FaceDown Chart1 6 Select All To manually enter the target value 1 Set a specified original P N 7505000005 on the DP face down 2 Enter maintenance item U411 3 Select Target 4 Select Auto and press the start key 5 Select DP FaceDown Chart1 6 Select All 7 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally comp...

Page 254: ...ge main scanning and auxiliary scanning of the specified original P N 302AC68243 and enter the values by executing maintenance item U425 2 Set a specified original P N 302AC68243 on the DP Cut the trailing edge of the original Figure 1 3 29 3 Enter maintenance item U411 4 Select Target 5 Select U425 and press the start key 6 Select DP FaceUp Chart2 7 Select INPUT Item No Description Display Descri...

Page 255: ...e start key Auto adjustment starts Matrix 1 Select Matrix 2 Set a specified original P N 303JX57020 on the DP face down 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When ALL is selected the adjustment of Input MTF Gamma and Matrix can be executed at once When adjusting place the three specified originals on the DP face down and then press the start key Set the original 303JX57020 and then place 30...

Page 256: ...ion Codes Description 01 Black band detection error scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge skew 02 Black band detection error scanner main scanning direction far end skew 03 Black band detection error scanner main scanning direction near end skew 03 Black band detection error scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge skew 04 Black band is not detected scanner auxiliary scanning...

Page 257: ...n scanning direction center line error 15 DP main scanning direction skew error 16 Main scanning direction magnification error 17 Service call error 18 DP paper misfeed error 19 PWB replacement error 1a Original error 1b Input gamma adjustment original error 1c Matrix adjustment original error 1d Original for the white reference compensation coefficient error 1e Lab value searching error 1f Lab va...

Page 258: ...ttern is outputted with light quantity setting lower than the 1st test pattern by 20 5 Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the output test pattern and place as the original 6 Press the start key the correction starts 7 After the correction is completed and press the start key A test pattern is outputted 3rd sheet 8 Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the output test pattern...

Page 259: ...es Description S001 Patch not detected E001 Engine status error S002 Original deviation in the main scanning direction E002 Spotted background error E003 Density error S003 Original deviation in the auxil iary scanning direction E004 Uneven density error EFFF Engine other error S004 Original inclination error C001 Controller error S005 Original type error CFFF Controller other error SFFF Scanner o...

Page 260: ...ed Item No Description Codes Description S001 Black band is not detected main scanning direction far end S002 Black band is not detected main scanning direction near end S003 Black band is not detected auxiliary scanning direction leading edge S004 Black band is not detected auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge S005 Auxiliary scanning direction skew 1 5 error S006 Main scanning direction ske...

Page 261: ...ay Description White Setting the white patch for the original for adjustment Black Setting the black patch for the original for adjustment Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the original for adjustment Gray2 Setting the Gray2 patch for the original for adjustment Gray3 Setting the Gray3 patch for the original for adjustment C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment M Setting the mage...

Page 262: ...ight edge black belt 2 of the original at F 15 mm from the top edge of black belt 1 5 Enter the values using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys in Dist2 6 Press the start key The value is set 7 Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the original at D and E 1 Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3...

Page 263: ...N875 Setting the N875 patch for the original for adjustment N475 Setting the N475 patch for the original for adjustment N125 Setting the N125 patch for the original for adjustment C Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment M Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Y Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment R Setting the red patch for the original for...

Page 264: ...surement procedure 1 Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt b of the original at D 35 mm from the left edge E 110 mm from the left edge and F 185 mm from the left edge respec tively 2 Apply the following formula for the values obtained D F 2 E 2 5 Enter the values solved using the cursor left right keys or numeric keys in Main Scan 6 Press the start key The value is set 7 Measure the...

Page 265: ...original at B 4 Enter the measured value using the keys in Main Scan 5 Measure the distance from the black belt of leading edge inside to the black belt of trailing edge inside of the original at C 6 Enter the measured value using the keys in Sub Scan 7 Press the start key The value is set Figure 1 3 32 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item ...

Page 266: ...rom an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Text Photo Density of each color in the text photo mode Photo Density of each color in the photo mode Photo Printout Density of each color in the printed photo mode...

Page 267: ...od Execute 1 Select Execute 2 Press the start key Calibration is executed Item No Description Display Description SMT Settings of multiple feed sensor on the side multi tray Display Description Conveying Sensor Multi feed sensor settings Calibration On Off Config Multi feed sensor On Off settings Display Description Sensor Non P Empty paper sensor display Sensor Displaying sensor value when paper ...

Page 268: ...1 Select On or Off 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description On Multi feed sensor is enabled Off Multi feed sensor is disabled ...

Page 269: ... execution parameters for calibration when powered up or reverted from auto sleep AP NE Paper interval calibration ON OFF setting at the time of cali bration near end after toner feed Leaving Time Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry out calibration based on the sleep time when the machine recovers from the sleep mode Driving Time Setting the standard time for judging whet...

Page 270: ...ation 0 to 9999 s 480 Display Description Short Setting the color print execution mode short Normal Setting the color print execution mode normal Long Setting the color print execution mode long Custom Setting the color print execution mode custom Auto Setting the color print execution mode auto Display Description On Executes calibration if fuser temperature is less than 50 C 122 F at power up or...

Page 271: ...tial setting Time sec Setting the drive standard time 300 to 3000 s 300 Display Description Setting range Initial setting Time sec Setting the drive standard time of con tinuous print 300 to 3600 s 3600 Display Description Setting range Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Thick ness C Toner thick layer calibration cyan 0 to 1000 890 890 890 890 Thick ness M Toner thick layer calibration magent...

Page 272: ...shold Proportion of black white printing 0 to 100 50 Display Description TCONT Developer bias control value after ID correction Laser Power Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration Bias Calib Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration T7 CTD T7 control value Display Description Before C Developer bias control value for cyan before ID correction Before M Developer bias...

Page 273: ...ght amount calibration cyan M Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration magenta Y Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration yellow K Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration black Display Description C Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration cyan M Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration magenta Y Sensor valu...

Page 274: ... The setting is set Setting Timing 1 Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Color Regist Setting the color registration correction operation Timing After the previous correction is executed color registration is co...

Page 275: ...to color registration adjustment value for magenta Auto Y Display the auto color registration adjustment value for yellow Manual C Display the manual color registration adjustment value for cyan Manual M Display the manual color registration adjustment value for magenta Manual Y Display the manual color registration adjustment value for yellow Display Description Status transfer speed adjustment v...

Page 276: ...Method Auto 1 Select Print 2 Press the start key A chart for adjustment is outputted 3 Set the output chart for adjustment as the original 4 Select Execute 5 Press the start key Color registration correction starts 6 When normally completed OK is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment error code is displayed Figure 1 3 33 Item No Description Display Description Auto Executing the aut...

Page 277: ...key after all values have been entered Color registration correction starts 7 Print a chart for adjustment 8 Verify that each scale is within the range of 1to A Figure 1 3 35 Item No Description Codes Description Codes Description S001 Patch not detected S004 Original inclination error S002 Original deviation in the main scanning direction S005 Original type error SFFF Scanner other error S003 Ori...

Page 278: ...an be adjusted Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Method Execute 1 Press the start key Cleaning the LSU slit glass Setting Cycle 1 Change the setting value using keys The setting can be changed by 1000 per step 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Execute ...

Page 279: ...n A larger value lowers the detection sensitivity but decreases the possibility of false detection 2 Press the start key The value is set Setting PDF Rotation 1 Change the setting value using keys or numeric keys Initial setting 0 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description ...

Page 280: ...ode2 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Mode1 Line speed Color and B W line speed is switched according to each original Controlling developer motor MCY Color and B W mode is switched accord ing to each original Mode2 Line speed Fixed at color line speed Controlli...

Page 281: ... to be cleared Cassette3 Cassette4 Cassette5 Cassette6 and Cassette7 cannot be cleared 2 Select the counts for all and press Clear 3 Press the start key The counts is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description MPT MP tray Cassette1 Cassette 1 Cassette2 Cassette 2 Cassette3 Cassette 3 paper feeder large c...

Page 282: ...isplayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 3 Select the count value for jam code and press Clear The individual counter cannot be cleared 4 Press the start key The counter value is cleared Method Total Cnt 1 Select Total Cnt The total number of jam code by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of jam count cannot be cleared Completion ...

Page 283: ... displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 3 Select the count value for service call code and press Clear The individual counter cannot be cleared 4 Press the start key The counter value is cleared Method Total Cnt 1 Select Total Cnt The total number of service call counts by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of service call coun...

Page 284: ...m No Description Display Description DP Counts of DP DF Counts of 1000 sheet or 4000 sheet finisher Display Description ADP No of single sided originals that has passed through the DP RADP No of double sided originals that has passed through the DP CIS No of dual scan originals that has passed through the DP Display Description Sorter No of copies that has passed Staple Frequency the stapler has b...

Page 285: ...escription Displays the total counter value Purpose To check the total counter value Method 1 Press the start key The total count value is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U910 Clearing the print coverage data Description Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time as shown on the ser...

Page 286: ...is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display metric Description Display inch Description A3 Paper feed counts for A3 Ledger Paper feed counts for Ledger B4 Paper feed counts for B4 Legal Paper feed counts for Legal A4 Paper feed counts for A4 Letter Paper feed counts for Letter B5 Paper feed counts for B5 Statement...

Page 287: ...riting The progress of selected item is displayed in When an error occurs the operation is canceled and an error code is displayed 8 When normally completed Finish is displayed 9 Turn the main power switch off and on after completing writing when selecting Import Item No Description Display Description Import Writing data from the USB memory to the machine Export Retrieving from the machine to a U...

Page 288: ...Box close error e113 Job accounting error in writing e419 Box creation error e114 Job accounting list error e41a Box creation error e115 Job accounting list error e41b Box deletion error e210 One touch open error e41c Box movement error e211 One touch list error e510 Program error in writing e212 One touch list error e511 Program error in reading e310 User managements backup error e610 Shortcut er...

Page 289: ...le reading error e917 Synchronization error d00c File writing error e918 Synchronization error d00d File copy error d000 Unspecified error d00e File compressed error d001 HDD unavailable d00f File decompressed error d002 USB memory is not inserted d010 Directory open error d003 File for writing is not found in the USB d011 Directory creation error d004 File for reading is not found in the HDD d012...

Page 290: ...art key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Item No Description Display Description Color Copy H Count value of full color copy coverage high Color Copy M Count value of full color copy coverage middle Color Copy L Count value of full color copy coverage ...

Page 291: ...fter replacement of the charger roller unit To clear the counter value when replacing the charger roller unit Method 1 Press the start key The current counts of the charger roller count for each color is displayed Clearing 1 Select the counts to be cleared 2 Select the counts for all and press Clear 3 Press the start key The counts is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting ...

Page 292: ... Change the setting value using the keys or numeric keys l The greater the value the larger the deflection the smaller the value the smaller the deflection If an original non feed jam or oblique feed occurs increase the setting value If wrinkling of original occurs decrease the value 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No...

Page 293: ...to assign a maintenance Nbr into a workflow 4 Press the start key The setting is set 5 Press the start key Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in succession Item No Description Display Description Continue Restarting an abandoned workflow Execute USB Executes a workflow housed in a USB flash device Execute Executes a workflow stored in the machine Entry USB Exports a workflow housed i...

Page 294: ...nd after verifying the main power indicator has gone off switch off the main power switch 2 Insert USB memory in USB memory slot 3 Turn the main power switch on 4 Enter maintenance item U952 5 Select Entry USB 6 Select the workflow 7 Select the work flow save area 8 Select Execute Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device to the machine Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting ...

Page 295: ...on the HDD to the USB memory 7 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On If a problem occurs during auto correction error code is displayed Error codes U969 Checking of toner area code Description Displays the toner area code Purpose To check the toner area code Method 1 Press the start key The toner area code is displayed Completion Press the stop clear ke...

Page 296: ...he start key 7 Send the print data to the machine Once the print data is stored into USB memory Finish will be displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U984 Checking the developer unit number Description Displays the developer unit number Purpose To check the developer unit number Method 1 Press the start key The developer unit number for ...

Page 297: ...by scanning the disk Purpose If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed the control information in the hard disk drive may be damaged Use this mode to restore the data Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Execute 3 Press the start key When scanning of the disk is complete the execution result is displayed 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Allow more than 5 seconds ...

Page 298: ...displayed U991 Checking the scanner operation count Description Displays the scanner operation count Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner Method 1 Press the start key The current operation counts is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance No item is displayed Item No Description Display Description CIS The accumulated time for the CIS to light Di...

Page 299: ... 1 Paper misfeed indication A D I F K K K K K K K K M M M M L L L H I J G B C E E E G C C A Misfeed in cassette 1 B Misfeed in cassette 2 C Misfeed in cassette 3 or 4 option D Misfeed in the MP tray E Misfeed in paper conveying unit paper conveying cover or PF paper conveying cover F Misfeed in the duplex section G Misfeed in the fuser section H Misfeed in document processor option I Misfeed in jo...

Page 300: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 1 4 2 2 Paper misfeed detection condition Machine Figure 1 4 2 Paper jam location PCS2 PCS1 MPFS DUS2 LPS DUS1 SBS FS1 MS RS FUES EFS FS2 ...

Page 301: ...er conveying unit is opened during print ing E 0111 Front cover open The front cover is opened during printing 0112 Duplex cover open The duplex cover is opened during printing F 0113 Paper conveying cover open The paper conveying cover is opened during print ing E 0114 Bridge cover open The bridge cover is opened during printing J 0115 Bridge eject cover open The bridge eject cover is opened duri...

Page 302: ...per feed from MP tray D 0511 Multiple sheets in cassette 1 Feed sensor 1 FS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 A 0512 Multiple sheets in cassette 2 Feed sensor 2 FS2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 B 0513 Multiple sheets in cassette 3 PF feed sensor 1 PFFS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder C 0514 Multiple sheets in cassette 4 PF...

Page 303: ...sensor 1 PFFS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 side large capacity feeder M 0537 Multiple sheets in cassette 7 PF feed sensor 2 PFFS2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 side large capacity feeder M 0545 No paper feed from side deck SD feed sensor SDFS does not turn on during paper feed from side deck L 0555 Multiple sheets in side deck SD feed sensor SDFS does ...

Page 304: ...d from cassette 3 paper feeder C 1504 Paper conveying sensor PCS does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 paper feeder C 1512 Paper conveying sensor stay jam Paper conveying sensor PCS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 E 1513 Paper conveying sensor PCS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder E 1514 Paper conveying sensor PCS does not turn off du...

Page 305: ...turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 side paper feeder L 2307 PF paper conveying sensor 2 non arrival jam PF paper conveying sensor 2 PFPCS2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 side paper feeder M 2317 PF paper conveying sensor 2 stay jam PF paper conveying sensor 2 PFPCS2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 side paper feeder M 2603 PF paper conveying sensor 1 ...

Page 306: ...tte 4 large capacity feeder E 2717 PF paper conveying sensor 2 PFPCS2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 side large capacity feeder L 3106 PF paper conveying sensor 1 non arrival jam PF paper conveying sensor 1 PFPCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 side large capacity feeder M 3107 PF paper conveying sensor 1 PFPCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from casse...

Page 307: ...turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 side multi tray L 3505 SM paper conveying sensor 2 non arrival jam SM paper conveying sensor 2 SMPCS2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 side multi tray L 3506 SM paper conveying sensor 2 SMPCS2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 side multi tray M 3507 SM paper conveying sensor 2 SMPCS2 does not turn on during paper feed fr...

Page 308: ... turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 side multi tray M 3705 SM paper conveying sensor 4 non arrival jam SM paper conveying sensor 4 SMPCS4 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 side multi tray L 3706 SM paper conveying sensor 4 SMPCS4 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 side multi tray M 3707 SM paper conveying sensor 4 SMPCS4 does not turn on during paper feed f...

Page 309: ... sensor RS does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray E 4011 Registration sensor stay jam Registration sensor RS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 E 4012 Registration sensor RS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 E 4013 Registration sensor RS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder E 4014 Registration sensor RS does not turn off durin...

Page 310: ...sensor LPS does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray E 4111 Loop sensor stay jam Loop sensor LPS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 E 4112 Loop sensor LPS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 E 4113 Loop sensor LPS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder E 4114 Loop sensor LPS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 paper f...

Page 311: ...ensor FUES does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray E 4211 Fuser eject sensor stay jam Fuser eject sensor FUES does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 G 4212 Fuser eject sensor FUES does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 G 4213 Fuser eject sensor FUES does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder G 4214 Fuser eject sensor FUES does not turn off du...

Page 312: ...sor 1 DUS1 does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray G 4311 Duplex sensor 1 stay jam Duplex sensor 1 DUS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 F 4312 Duplex sensor 1 DUS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 F 4313 Duplex sensor 1 DUS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder F 4314 Duplex sensor 1 DUS1 does not turn off during paper feed...

Page 313: ...eed from MP tray F 4411 Duplex sensor 2 stay jam Duplex sensor 2 DUS2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 F 4412 Duplex sensor 2 DUS2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 F 4413 Duplex sensor 2 DUS2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder F 4414 Duplex sensor 2 DUS2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 paper feeder F 4415 Duple...

Page 314: ...sensor EFS does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray G 4611 Eject full sensor stay jam Eject full sensor EFS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 G 4612 Eject full sensor EFS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 G 4613 Eject full sensor EFS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder G 4614 Eject full sensor EFS does not turn off during pape...

Page 315: ...sensor SBS does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray G 4711 Switchback sensor stay jam Switchback sensor SBS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 I 4712 Switchback sensor SBS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 I 4713 Switchback sensor SBS does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder I 4714 Switchback sensor SBS does not turn off during pape...

Page 316: ...1 BRCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section G 4909 Bridge conveying sensor 1 BRCS1 does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray G 4911 Bridge conveying sensor 1 stay jam Bridge conveying sensor 1 BRCS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1 J 4912 Bridge conveying sensor 1 BRCS1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2 J 4913 Bridge conveying sensor 1 ...

Page 317: ...assette 3 paper feeder J 5004 Bridge conveying sensor 2 BRCS2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 paper feeder J 5005 Bridge conveying sensor 2 BRCS2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 side multi tray side deck J 5006 Bridge conveying sensor 2 BRCS2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 side paper feeder J 5007 Bridge conveying sensor 2 BRCS2 does not tu...

Page 318: ...on J 5019 Bridge conveying sensor 2 BRCS2 does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray J 5101 Bridge eject sensor non arrival jam Bridge eject sensor BRES does not turn on dur ing paper feed from cassette 1 J 5102 Bridge eject sensor BRES does not turn on dur ing paper feed from cassette 2 J 5103 Bridge eject sensor BRES does not turn on dur ing paper feed from cassette 3 paper feeder J 5104 B...

Page 319: ...Bridge eject sensor BRES does not turn off dur ing paper feed from MP tray J 6000 DF paper entry error DF paper entry sensor DFPES turns on before the eject signal is output from the machine 4000 sheet finisher K 6001 DF paper entry sensor DFPES turns on before the eject signal is output from the machine 1000 sheet finisher K 6020 DF front cover open DF front upper cover is opened during operation...

Page 320: ...specified time of DF paper entry sensor DFPES turning on 4000 sheet finisher K 6301 DF middle eject sensor DFMES does not turn on within specified time of DF paper entry sensor DFPES turning on 1000 sheet finisher K 6310 DF middle eject sensor stay jam DF middle eject sensor DFMES is not turned off within specified time of its turning on 4000 sheet finisher K 6311 DF middle eject sensor DFMES is n...

Page 321: ...hin specified time after driving the DF side registration motor 1 DFSRM1 4000 sheet finisher K 6811 DF side registration sensor 1 DFSRS1 is not turned off within specified time after driving the DF side registration motor 1 DFSRM1 1000 sheet finisher K 6910 DF side registration sensor 2 stay jam DF side registration sensor 2 DFSRS2 is not turned off within specified time after driving the DF side ...

Page 322: ...r CFSTS is not turned on within specified time after driving the CF staple motor CFSTM K 7700 CF paper conveying sensor non arrival jam CF paper conveying sensor CFPCS is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received K 7710 CF paper conveying sensor stay jam CF paper conveying sensor CFPCS is not turned off within specified time of its turning on K ...

Page 323: ... sensor DPTS turning on H 9200 DP registration sensor non arrival jam DP registration sensor DPRS does not turn on within specified time of DP feed sensor DPFS turning on H 9210 DP registration sensor stay jam DP registration sensor DPRS does not turn off within specified time of DP timing sensor DPTS turning on H 9300 DP CIS sensor non arrival jam DP CIS sensor DPCS does not turn on within specif...

Page 324: ...on within specified time of DP timing sensor DPTS turning on H 9610 DP eject sensor stay jam DP eject sensor DPES does not turn off within specified time of DP timing sensor DPTS turning off H Code Contents Conditions Jam location Refer to figure 1 4 1 for paper misfeed indication see page 1 4 1 ...

Page 325: ... a problem is detected the machine stops print ing and display an error message on the operation panel An error message consists of a message prompting a contact to service personnel and a four digit error code indicating the type of the error Figure 1 4 3 Machine failure Call service C Error occurred Turn the main power switch off and on C ...

Page 326: ...C address is invalid Defective flash memory Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 49 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 0150 Backup memory read write error engine PWB No response is issued from the device in reading writing for 5 ms or more and this problem is repeated 5 times successively Mismatch of reading da...

Page 327: ...d into the socket on the main PWB correctly Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 49 0800 Image processing error JAM010X is detected twice Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 49 0830 FAX control PWB flash pro gram area checksum error A checksum error occurred with the program of the FAX control PWB De...

Page 328: ...r source PWB Replace the power source PWB and check for correct operation 1000 MP lift motor error After the MP lift motor is driven the ON status of MP lift sensors 1 and 2 cannot be detected for 1 5 s Defective MP plate elevation mecha nism Check to see if the MP plate can move smoothly and repair it if any problem is found Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert th...

Page 329: ...e engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 1020 Lift motor 2 error After cassette 2 is inserted lift sensor 2 does not turn on within 12 s This error is detected 4 times successively The lock signal of the motor is detected continuously for 1 s Defective bottom plate elevation mechanism in the cassette Check to see if the bottom plate can move smoothly and...

Page 330: ...F main PWB Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for the paper feeder 1040 PF lift motor 2 error paper feeder After cassette 4 is inserted PF lift sensor 2 does not turn on within 12 s This error is detected 5 times successively During driving the motor the lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected for 1 s or more 5 times succes sively However the first 1 s after motor ...

Page 331: ... PWB Replace the SM main PWB Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder 1060 PF lift motor 1 error side paper feeder After cassette 6 is inserted PF lift sensor 1 does not turn on within 12 s This error is detected 5 times successively During driving the motor the lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected for 1 s or more 5 times succes sively However the first 1 s after motor is...

Page 332: ... However the first 1 s after PF lift motor 1 is turned on is excluded from detection Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF lift motor 1 and PF main PWB YC7 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears...

Page 333: ...n PWB Replace the SM main PWB Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder 1350 SM multi feed sensor error side multi tray The SM multi feed sensor has signaled the presence of paper for 10 ms continuously Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable SM multi feed sensor and S...

Page 334: ... multi tray Follow installation instruction carefully again Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable SM main PWB YC1 and engine PWB YC19 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 Defective SM main PWB Replace the SM main PWB R...

Page 335: ...m 2 locations occurs 8 times successively Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Transfer belt unit and engine PWB YC3 Defective transfer belt unit Replace the transfer belt unit and check for correct...

Page 336: ...tor Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum motor K and motor control PWB YC5 Motor control PWB YC3 and engine PWB YC9 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective drum motor K Replace the drum motor K Defective engine PWB Replace t...

Page 337: ...ty within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum motor M and motor control PWB YC5 Motor control PWB YC3 and engine PWB YC9 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective drum motor M Replace the drum motor M Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for ...

Page 338: ...le If none replace the cable Drum motor C and motor control PWB YC4 Motor control PWB YC3 and engine PWB YC9 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective drum motor C Replace the drum motor C Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page...

Page 339: ...le If none replace the cable Fuser motor and feed PWB 1 YC18 Feed PWB 1 YC1 and engine PWB YC6 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective fuser motor Replace the fuser motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 2550 Pap...

Page 340: ...uity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB YC16 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective PF paper feed motor Replace the PF paper feed motor Defective PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for th...

Page 341: ...ity within the connector cable If none replace the cable PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB YC16 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective PF paper feed motor Replace the PF paper feed motor Defective PF main PWB Replace the PF main PWB Refer to the ser vice manual for the...

Page 342: ...place the cable Transfer release motor and relay PWB YC14 Relay PWB YC14 and feed PWB 1 YC14 Feed PWB 1 YC1 and engine PWB YC6 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective transfer release motor Replace the transfer release motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and...

Page 343: ...onnec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Transfer skew motor and engine PWB YC3 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective transfer skew motor Replace the transfer...

Page 344: ...able Transfer belt sensor and engine PWB YC3 Defective transfer belt sensor Replace the transfer belt sensor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 2860 Transfer belt sensor error The signal is not received for 100 ms in succession Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity wit...

Page 345: ...e or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable LED lamp PWB and ISC PWB YC6 ISC PWB YC3 and main PWB YC11 Defective LED lamp PWB Replace the LED lamp PWB and check for correct operation Defective ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check fo...

Page 346: ... DP relay PWB and check for correct operation 3500 Communication error between scanner and ASIC An error code is detected Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable ISC PWB YC3 and main PWB YC11 Defective ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation Defective main...

Page 347: ...ctor Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Polygon motor C and LSU relay PWB YC9 LSU relay PWB YC3 and engine PWB YC12 Defective polygon motor C Replace the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 25 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 4003 Polygon motor M synchro nization error After ...

Page 348: ...ne PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 4012 Polygon motor C steady state error After polygon motor C is stabi lized the ready signal is at the H level for 15 s continuously Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Polygon motor C and LSU...

Page 349: ...page 1 5 25 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 4102 BD initialization error C After polygon motor C is driven ASIC detects a BD error for 1 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB...

Page 350: ...e 1 5 25 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 4202 BD steady state error C The BD signal is not detected Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB YC10 LSU relay PWB YC3 and engine PWB ...

Page 351: ...d the ready signal is at the H level for 1 s continu ously Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable LSU cleaning motor and engine PWB YC21 Defective drive transmission sys tem of motor Check if the gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushes and gears Check for broken gears...

Page 352: ...ted when Vpp adjustment Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable High voltage PWB 1 YC1 and engine PWB YC16 Defective high volt age PWB 1 Replace the high voltage PWB 1 and check for correct operation see page 1 5 59 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for co...

Page 353: ... See page 1 4 59 Broken fuser thermistor 1 wire Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 45 Fuser thermostat triggered Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 45 Defective fuser IH Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 45 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 6040 Fuser heater error Input from fuser thermistor 1 is abnormal value continu ously for 1 s De...

Page 354: ...nput from fuser thermistor 4 is 992 or more A D value continuously for 1 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Fuser unit and engine PWB YC26 Deformed connec tor pin See page 1 4 59 Defective triac See page 1 4 59 Broken fuser thermistor 4 wire Replace the fuser unit see ...

Page 355: ...gh fuser thermistor 2 temperature Fuser thermistor 2 detects a temperature higher than 250 C 482 F for 1 s Deformed connec tor pin See page 1 4 59 Defective triac See page 1 4 59 Shorted fuser thermistor 2 Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 45 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 6230 Broken fuser thermistor 2 wire Input from fuser thermisto...

Page 356: ...hermistor 3 Replace the fuser unit see page 1 5 45 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 6330 Broken fuser thermistor 3 wire Input from fuser thermistor 3 is 992 or more A D value continuously for 1 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If non...

Page 357: ...or the units including the con nectors Defective triac Remove the power cord and check that the resistance between terminals T1 and T2 of the triac CR001 is of several Mega Ohms and not shorted see figure 1 4 4 If failed replace the power source PWB see page 1 5 56 Figure 1 4 4 6610 Fuser release motor error When the fuser release motor is driven the fuser release sensor does not turn on off for 5...

Page 358: ...ck for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Fuser IH PWB YC4 and engine PWB YC26 Defective fuser IH PWB Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for correct operation Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 6740 Abnormally high fuser IH PWB temperature 2 The input detect temperature is greater than 105 C 221 F Defective con...

Page 359: ...t the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Fuser IH PWB YC4 and engine PWB YC26 Defective fuser IH PWB Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for correct operation Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 6900 Fuser front fan motor error When the fuser front fan motor is driven alarm signal is dete...

Page 360: ...ct in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable IH fan motor and feed PWB 1 YC11 Feed PWB 1 YC2 and engine PWB YC5 Defective IH fan motor Replace the IH fan motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 6950 Fuser IH PWB communica tion error No response is received in 30...

Page 361: ... engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 7003 Toner motor M error When the toner motor M is driven the pulse of screw sensor M is not detected Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Toner motor M and engine PWB YC27 Defective screw ...

Page 362: ...connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Toner sensor M and front PWB YC11 Front PWB YC2 and engine PWB YC10 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 7104 Toner sensor Y error Sensor output value of 60 or less or 944 or more continued for 3 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con ne...

Page 363: ...ective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 7222 Broken LSU thermistor C wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 230 Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB YC10 LSU relay PWB YC3 and en...

Page 364: ... engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 7232 Short circuited LSU therm istor C The sensor input sampling is less than 69 Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB YC10 LSU relay PWB YC3 and engine ...

Page 365: ...ve engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 7242 Broken developer thermis tor C wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 230 Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Developer unit C and front PWB YC13 Front PWB YC2 and engine PW...

Page 366: ...nnector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Developer unit C and front PWB YC13 Front PWB YC2 and engine PWB YC10 Defective devel oper thermistor C Replace developer unit C see page 1 5 36 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation see page 1 5 54 7253 Short circuited developer thermistor M The sensor input sampling is l...

Page 367: ...rent type of the developer unit is installed Install the correct developer unit 7404 Developer unit Y type mis match error Absence of the developer unit Y is detected Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Developer unit Y and front PWB YC15 Front PWB YC2 and engine PWB YC10...

Page 368: ... Drum K EEPROM error No response is issued from the device in reading writing for 5 ms or more and this problem is repeated five times successively Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti ...

Page 369: ...Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Drum PWB Y and front PWB YC14 Front PWB YC2 and engine PWB YC10 Defective drum PWB Y Replace the drum unit Y see page 1 5 36 7911 Developer unit K EEPROM error N...

Page 370: ...cessively Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Developer unit M and front PWB YC11 Front PWB YC2 and engine PWB YC10 Defective devel oper unit M Replace the developer unit M see page 1 5 36 7914 Dev...

Page 371: ...d engine PWB YC11 Defective APC PWB C Replace the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 25 7943 Laser scanner unit M EEPROM error Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connect...

Page 372: ...lace the punch home position sensor Defective punch motor Replace the punch motor Defective PWB Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8020 Punch motor error 2 Home position is not obtained in 3 seconds after home posi tion is initialized or in standby Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check fo...

Page 373: ... or DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8090 DF paddle motor error When the DF paddle motor is driven DF paddle sensor does not turn on within 1 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF paddle motor and DF main PWB YC15 DF paddle sensor and DF ...

Page 374: ...hift motor 1 error When the DF shift motor 1 is driven DF shift sensor 1 does not turn on within 160 ms Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF shift motor 1 and DF main PWB YC14 DF shift sensor 1 and DF main PWB YC23 Defective DF shift sensor 1 Replace the DF shift sensor...

Page 375: ...sur face sensor does not turn on within 20 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF tray motor and DF main PWB YC16 DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB YC22 DF tray upper surface sensor and DF main PWB YC21 YC13 Defective connec tor cable or poor contact ...

Page 376: ...r 1 or DF tray upper surface sensor Defective DF tray motor Replace the DF tray motor Defective DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8160 DF tray motor error 3 When the main tray has descended DF tray sensor 3 does not turn on within 20 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity...

Page 377: ...ace DF side registration motor 1 Defective DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8180 DF side registration motor 1 error 2 JAM6810 is detected twice Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF side registration motor 1 and DF m...

Page 378: ...ace DF side registration motor 2 Defective DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8200 DF side registration motor 2 error 2 JAM6910 is detected twice Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF side registration motor 2 and DF m...

Page 379: ...r Replace the DF staple sensor Defective DF slide motor Replace the DF slide motor Defective DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8230 DF staple motor error 1 JAM7000 is detected twice Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable ...

Page 380: ...nsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF tray motor and DF main PWB YC16 DF tray sensor 3 and DF main PWB YC23 Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 1000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF tray motor and DF main PWB YC14 DF tray ...

Page 381: ...the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable CF adjustment motor 1 2 and CF main PWB YC10 CF adjustment sensor 1 2 and CF main PWB YC20 Defective CF adjustment sensor 1 2 Replace CF adjustment sensor 1 2 Defective CF adjustment motor 1 2 Replace CF adjustment motor 1 2 Defective CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB and check f...

Page 382: ... registration sensor 1 Defective CF side registration motor 1 Replace CF side registration motor 1 Defective CF main PWB Replace the CF main PWB and check for correct operation 8360 CF main motor error During driving the motor lock signal is detected for 1 s con tinuously Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the conne...

Page 383: ...e con nector 4000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Punch slide motor and punch PWB YC3 Punch PWB YC1 and DF main PWB YC7 Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector 1000 sheet finisher Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Punch slid...

Page 384: ... main PWB YC5 MB home position sensor and MB main PWB YC2 Defective MB home position sen sor Replace the MB home position sensor Defective MB con veying motor Replace the MB conveying motor Defective MB main PWB Replace the MB main PWB and check for correct operation 8520 MB conveying motor error 2 When standby operation MB home position sensor does not turn off within 1 s Defective connec tor cab...

Page 385: ... Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable DF main PWB YC7 and engine PWB YC18 Improper installa tion EEPROM Check the installation of the EEPROM and remedy if necessary Defective DF main PWB Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation 8930 Center folding unit backup error Read and write data does not match 3 times in success...

Page 386: ... Defective DP lift sensor 1 Replace the DP lift sensor 1 Defective DP lift motor Replace the DP lift motor Defective DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation 9050 DP lift motor going down error When the DP lift motor is driven DP lift sensor 2 does not turn on within 2 s Defective connec tor cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for co...

Page 387: ...and check for correct opera tion Defective DPSHD PWB Replace the DPSHD PWB and check for correct operation 9100 Coin vender control PWB error Communication error has been detected at the coin mec of the coin vender control PWB Defective coin vender control PWB Replace the coin mec 9110 Coin vender error Communication error has been detected in connection with the coin mec and the rejector Rejector...

Page 388: ...in the change tube Check visually and remedy Poor contact in the connector Check if the change empty sensor is intact Defective change empty sensor Replace the coin mec Defective coin vender control PWB Replace the coin mec 9160 Coin vender pay out error Coin is paid out despite the pay out motor is determined not active Defective pay out motor Replace the coin mec 9170 Coin vender pay out sensor ...

Page 389: ...ee page 1 5 54 F041 Communication error between main PWB and scanner engine Defective main PWB Turn the main power switch off on to restart the machine If the error is not resolved replace main PWB see page 1 5 49 Defective ISC PWB Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation F050 Print engine ROM check sum error Defective engine PWB Turn the main power switch off on to restart the machine ...

Page 390: ...ther 9 Spots are printed 10 Image is blurred See page 1 4 96 See page 1 4 96 See page 1 4 97 See page 1 4 97 See page 1 4 97 11 The leading edge of the image is con sistently mis aligned with the original 12 The leading edge of the image is spo radically mis aligned with the original 13 Paper is wrin kled 14 Offset occurs 15 Part of image is missing See page 1 4 98 See page 1 4 98 See page 1 4 98 ...

Page 391: ...ive engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 54 Defective developer bias output Defective connector cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable High voltage PWB 1 YC1 2 and engine PWB YC16 High voltage PWB 1 YC3 4 and engine PWB YC17 Defective high voltage PWB 1 Replace the high voltage PWB 1 s...

Page 392: ...ctive high voltage PWB 1 Replace the high voltage PWB 1 see page 1 5 59 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 54 Exposure lamp fails to light Defective connector cable or poor contact in the con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable LED lamp PWB and ISC PWB CN6 ISC PWB YC3 and main PWB YC11 Defective exposur...

Page 393: ...efective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB see page 1 5 54 Defective color calibration Perform the color calibration Refer to opera tion guide Insufficient toner If the display shows the message requesting toner replenishment replace the container Insufficient agitation of toner container Shake the toner container vertically approxi mately 10 times Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions rep...

Page 394: ...leaning Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Dirty slit glass Clean the slit glass Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 36 Deformed or worn cleaning blade in the drum unit Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 36 Dirty lens of ISU Clean l...

Page 395: ...um Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 36 Deformed or worn cleaning blade in the drum unit Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 36 Flawed developer roller Replace the developer unit see page 1 5 36 Dirty heat roller and press roller Clean the heat roller and press roller Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Scanner moves erratically Check if there is any foreign matter on the fro...

Page 396: ...aintenance mode U066 to readjust the scanner leading edge registration see page 1 3 54 Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper feed clutch middle clutch registration clutch or duplex clutch operating incor rectly 30 ppm model 35 ppm model Check the installation of the clutch If it operates incor rectly replace it Paper feed clutch middle motor registration motor or duplex m...

Page 397: ... creased Replace the paper Drum condensation Perform the drum refresh Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 36 Dirty transfer belt Clean the transfer belt Replace the transfer belt unit if it is extremely dirty see page 1 5 41 Dirty transfer roller Clean the transfer roller Replace the transfer roller if it is extremely dirty see page 1 5 43 D...

Page 398: ...readjust the center line of image printing see page 1 3 36 Misadjusted scanner center line Run maintenance item U067 to readjust the scanner lead ing edge registration see page 1 3 55 Original is not placed cor rectly Place the original correctly Paper is not placed correctly Place the paper correctly Print example Causes Check procedures corrective measures The device is installed in an altitude ...

Page 399: ...he bushes and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any 3 Defective motor Replace the MP lift motor 4 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 54 3 Scanner motor does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Scanner mo...

Page 400: ...ce the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 54 7 Duplex motor 1 does not operate 45 ppm 55 ppm model only 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Duplex motor 1 and relay PWB YC16 Relay PWB YC13 and engine PWB YC23 2 Defective drive trans mission system Che...

Page 401: ...r 2 3 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 54 12 LSU fan motor does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable LSU fan motor and front PWB YC16 Front PWB YC2 and engine PWB YC10 2 Defective motor Replace the LSU fan motor ...

Page 402: ...place the eject rear fan motor 3 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 54 18 Power source fan motor does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Power source fan motor and engine PWB YC22 2 Defective motor Replace the po...

Page 403: ...feed clutch 3 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 54 24 Registration clutch does not operate 30 ppm 35 ppm model only 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Registration clutch and feed PWB 1 YC22 Feed PWB 1 YC2 and engine PWB YC...

Page 404: ... within the connector cable If none replace the cable Feedshift and front PWB YC5 Front PWB YC3 and engine PWB YC7 2 Defective solenoid Replace the feedshift solenoid 1 or 2 3 Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 54 30 Cleaning solenoid does not operate 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for c...

Page 405: ... PWB and check for correct operation see page 1 5 54 34 The size of paper on the MP tray is not displayed cor rectly 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable MP paper length switch and relay PWB YC2 MP paper width switch and relay PWB YC2 Relay PWB YC12 and feed PWB 1 YC17 Fee...

Page 406: ...e PWB YC12 2 Defective switch Replace the paper conveying unit switch 38 A message indicat ing cover open is displayed when the duplex cover is closed 1 Defective connector cable or poor con tact in the connector Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none replace the cable Duplex cover switch and relay PWB YC7 Relay PWB YC1 and feed PWB 1 YC14 Feed PWB 1 YC...

Page 407: ... Defective registration motor installation 45 ppm 55 ppm model Defective registration clutch installation 30 ppm 35 ppm model Check visually and remedy if necessary 3 Skewed paper feed Paper width guide in a cassette installed incorrectly Check the paper width guide visually and remedy or replace if necessary 4 Multiple sheets of paper are fed Check if the paper is excessively curled Change the pa...

Page 408: ...k if the following clutches are installed correctly Paper feed clutch 1 2 Assist clutch 1 2 1 Paper conveying clutch MP paper feed clutch Registration clutch 2 Middle clutch 2 Duplex clutch 1 2 2 1 45 ppm 55 ppm model only 2 30 ppm 35 ppm model only Check visually and remedy if necessary Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures ...

Page 409: ...password 2 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 3 Check the host if the folder is properly shared 1103 Destined host folder and or file names are invalid 1 Check illegal characters are not contained within these names 2 Check the name of the folder and files conform with the naming syntax 3 Confirm destined host and folder 1105 SMB protocol is not enabled 1 Confirm device s SMB ...

Page 410: ...vice 3 Check the FTP port number 4 Confirm device s network parameters 5 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 6 Check the FTP server name 2102 Access to the FTP server has failed Connection timeout 1 Check the FTP server name 2 Check the FTP port number 3 Confirm device s network parameters 4 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 5 Check the FTP server name 220...

Page 411: ...ameters 5 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 6 Check the SMTP POP3 server 2102 Connection to the SMTP POP3 server has failed Connection timeout 1 Check the SMTP POP3 server name 2 Check the SMTP POP3 port number 3 Confirm device s network parameters 4 Confirm the network parameters the device is con nected 5 Check the SMTP POP3 server 2201 Connection to the SMTP POP3 server ha...

Page 412: ...tion errors start with an E indica tion followed by five digits The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause while the lower two indicate the detailed classification Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have 00 as the last two digits Figure 1 4 5 Error code U X X X X X Detailed classification of error code General classification ...

Page 413: ...017XX A communication error occurred before starting T 30 protocol during transmission in V 34 mode refer to P 1 4 120 U017XX error code table U018XX A communication error occurred before starting T 30 protocol during reception in V 34 mode refer to P 1 4 120 U018XX error code table U03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started U03200 In interoffice subaddre...

Page 414: ...ission was interrupted because the permit ID s did not agree with U05200 Password check reception or restricted reception was interrupted because the permit ID s did not match the rejected FAX number s did match or the destination receiver did not return its phone number U05300 The password check reception or the restricted reception was interrupted because the permitted numbers did not match the ...

Page 415: ...ubaddress based confidential reception was interrupted because the specified subad dress box was not registered U00450 The destination transmitter disconnected because the permit ID s did not agree with while the destination transmitter is in password check transmission or restricted trans mission U00460 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not regist...

Page 416: ... of command retransfers was exceeded ECM U01022 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal and the preset num ber of command retransfers was exceeded ECM U01028 T5 time out was detected during ECM transmission ECM U01052 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal ECM U01080 A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS NULL signal U01092 During tra...

Page 417: ...otocol U01141 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal U01143 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal U01155 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal short protocol U01160 During message reception transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time per line U01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message rec...

Page 418: ...ivalent device training For example INFO0 B Bbar A Abar for polling reception probing tone was not detected U01810 A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 primary channel equivalent device training For example S Sbar PP TRN was not detected U01820 A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel before entering the ...

Page 419: ...When removing the hook of the connector be sure to release the hook Take care not to get the cables caught To reassemble the parts use the original screws If the types and the sizes of screws are not known refer to the PARTS LIST 2 Drum Note the following when handling or storing the drum When removing the drum unit never expose the drum surface to strong direct light Keep the drum at an ambient t...

Page 420: ...ollows A black colored band when seen through the left side window A shiny or gold colored band when seen through the right side window The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Kyocera Mita branded toner container otherwise it is a counterfeit Figure 1 5 1 The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse Figure 1 5 2 Validation viewer Validation viewer ...

Page 421: ...per feed unit Procedure Remove the primary paper feed unit 1 Pull the cassette 1 and cassette 2 out completely 2 Pull the paper conveying unit out 3 Open the right lower cover 4 Remove the strap and then remove the right lower cover Figure 1 5 3 Paper conveying unit Right lower cover Strap ...

Page 422: ...ar cover 7 Remove three screws B and then remove the right lower rear cover Figure 1 5 4 8 Open the handle cover 9 Remove three screws 10 Unhook the hook and then remove the right lower front cover Figure 1 5 5 Right middle rear cover Screw A Screws B Right lower rear cover Handle cover Screws Screw Hook Right lower front cover Right lower front cover ...

Page 423: ... feed unit 13 Remove the primary paper feed unit Use the specific primary paper feed unit depending on model 30 ppm 35 ppm or 45 ppm 55 ppm Figure 1 5 7 Connector Connector Screws Screws Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit 45ppm 55ppm 30ppm 35ppm Primary paper feed unit ...

Page 424: ...m 55ppm model you must install the primary paper feed unit while pushing the retard release lever of the lower side when the primary paper feed unit is refitted Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit lower side Primary paper feed unit Pin Pin Driving coupler Driving coupler Driving coupler Pin 45ppm 55ppm 45ppm 55ppm 30ppm 35ppm Primary paper feed unit Retard relea...

Page 425: ...feed unit see page 1 5 3 Detaching the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley 2 Remove four stop rings Figure 1 5 9 3 Slide the paper feed pulley shaft 4 Remove the joint and three bushes 5 Remove the spring and forwarding pul ley holder assembly Stop ring Primary paper feed unit Stop rings Stop ring Joint Bush Paper feed pulley shaft Bush Bush Spring Forwarding pulley holder assembly ...

Page 426: ...e to correctly align it with the paper feed pulley so that the on way clutches meet each other Figure 1 5 11 8 Pull the forwarding pulley from the axis hole of forwarding pulley holder Figure 1 5 12 Primary paper feed shaft Feed gear Z30H OW Feed gear Z30H OW Oneway clutch Paper feed pulley Paper feed pulley Forwarding pulley holder Forwarding pulley Gear Axis hole Axis hole Forwarding pulley hold...

Page 427: ...rwarding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley 13 Refit the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley to the pri mary paper feed unit 14 When the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley or separation pulley is replaced perform maintenance mode U903 clearing the jam counter see page 1 3 188 Figure 1 5 14 Hole Hole Primary lower plate Spring Retard holder Retard holder Axis hole...

Page 428: ...separation pulley while pushing the retard release lever 6 Clean or replace the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley 7 Refit the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley to the pri mary paper feed unit 8 When the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley or separation pulley is replaced perform maintenance mode U903 clearing the jam counter see page 1 3 188 Figure 1...

Page 429: ...edure 1 Pull the paper conveying unit out 2 Open the MP tray 3 Remove four screws Figure 1 5 17 4 Unhook eight hooks and then remove the right cover and DU cover assembly Figure 1 5 18 Screw MP tray Screw Paper conveying unit Right cover Right cover DU cover assembly Hooks Hook Hooks ...

Page 430: ...e be sure to fit in the positioning hole that was previously used Figure 1 5 19 8 Remove the MP tray When refitting the MP tray insert it in the MP tray paper feed unit side by turning the lift arm Figure 1 5 20 Installation hole Connector Connector Wire saddle Wire saddle MP tray Lift arm MP tray MP tray paper feed unit ...

Page 431: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 1 5 13 9 Remove two screws 10 Remove the MP tray paper feed unit Figure 1 5 21 MP tray paper feed unit Screw Screw MP tray paper feed unit ...

Page 432: ...e hooks and then remove the Du lower guide Remove the DU lower guide easy by bending the top base that the hook is hooking because the hook of the DU lower guide lacks flexibility Figure 1 5 22 3 Remove the stop ring A and then slide the driving joint 4 Slide the bush A 5 Remove the stop ring B and then remove the bush B Figure 1 5 23 DU lower guide Top base MP tray paper feed unit Hook Hooks Stop...

Page 433: ... rings 9 Pull the feed MPF shaft out 10 Remove two bushes one way gear Z30R and MP paper feed pulley To refit the one way gear Z30R mount the gear in the correct direction as shown Figure 1 5 25 Hook Hook Top base Top base Spring Spring Feed holder assembly Feed MFP shaft Stop ring Stop ring MP paper feed pulley Bush Bush Oneway gear Z30R Oneway clutch Oneway gear Z30R ...

Page 434: ...p gear Z30R and MP for warding pulley out from the pickup MFP shaft Figure 1 5 26 Detaching the MP separation pulley 13 Unhook two hooks and then remove the middle guide Figure 1 5 27 Feed gear Z26H Axis hole Axis hole Feed MPF holder Pickup gear Z30R MP forwarding pulley Pickup MFP shaft Middle guide Hook Hook ...

Page 435: ...ove the spring 15 Release the uniting of joint by sliding the retard holder assembly Figure 1 5 28 16 Remove the retard holder assembly by turning it as shown Figure 1 5 29 Spring Joint Retard holder assembly Retard holder assembly ...

Page 436: ...feed pulley and MP sepa ration pulley 21 Refit the MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley to the MP tray paper feed unit 22 When the MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley or MP separation pul ley is replaced perform maintenance mode U903 clearing the jam counter see page 1 3 188 Figure 1 5 30 Torque limiter Stop ring Stop ring Bush Bush Retard MPF shaft Retard holde...

Page 437: ... guiding plate and reflector Do not clean it using a cleaning cloth that adheres the fiber easily Figure 1 5 31 Procedure 1 Remove the original cover or the docu ment processor 2 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU front cover 3 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover Figure 1 5 32 LED mount assembly Reflector Diffusion seat Diffusion seat Light guiding plate White LED LED lamp...

Page 438: ...LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 1 5 20 4 Remove two screws and then remove the ISU rear cover Figure 1 5 33 5 Remove the platen 6 Peels two films off Figure 1 5 34 Screw ISU rear cover Screw Platen Film Film Film Film ...

Page 439: ...embly 12 Check or replace the LED mount assembly and refit all the removed parts When cleaning the reflector the light guiding plate and the diffusion sheet of the LED mount assembly clean it by air blow Not to leave the hair dust 13 When the LED mount assembly is replaced perform maintenance mode U411 Adjusting the scanner automati cally see page 1 3 157 Figure 1 5 36 FFC guide Hook Hook Hook FFC...

Page 440: ... 2 Remove the platen see page 1 5 19 3 Remove six screws and then remove the lens cover Figure 1 5 37 4 Remove the connector 5 Remove the FFC from the FFC connec tor with a lock When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock remove it after release the lock by lifting the lock lever up see page 1 5 50 Figure 1 5 38 Lens cover Screw Screws Screw ISU PWB FFC connector with a lock Connector...

Page 441: ... Remove four screws and then remove the ISU The ISU s are different depending on 30ppm model 35ppm model and 45ppm model 55ppm model Figure 1 5 39 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Screw Screw Screw ISU ISU Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw ...

Page 442: ...of seal pasted on lens Match the line c of ISU to the position ing line b of same number on frame side The rear and front of machine Match the edge e of ISU to the posi tioning line d on frame side 8 Fix the ISU as before with four screws 9 Refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 40 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm ISU b a c e ISU d b c e d Lens a Lens ...

Page 443: ...ter cover and the left filter 5 Remove two transfer belt filters 6 Remove the left cover lid 7 Open the front cover and remove screw A 8 Remove three screws B and then remove the left cover Figure 1 5 41 9 Remove four screws and then remove the LSU retainer Figure 1 5 42 Screw B Screws B Screw A Left cover lid Toner filter Left filter cover Left filter Left cover Transfer belt filters LSU retainer...

Page 444: ...30 ppm model 35 ppm model FFC connector with a lock 1pcs Connector 2pcs 45 ppm model 55 ppm model FFC connector with a lock 2pcs Connector 2pcs When remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock removing it after release the lock by lifting the lock lever up Figure 1 5 44 Middle feed plate LSU retainer pin Screw Screw Spring LSU FFC FFC FFC connector with a lock 45ppm 55ppm only Connectors FFC...

Page 445: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 1 5 27 14 Pull the LSU out from the body of the machine Figure 1 5 45 15 Remove seven screws and then remove the LSU mount lid Figure 1 5 46 LSU LSU mount lid Screws Screws Screws Screw ...

Page 446: ...hout a lock When remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock removing it after release the lock by lifting the lock lever up 19 Remove the electric wire from the elec tric wire support portion 20 Remove the FFC from the FFC support potion Figure 1 5 48 LSU relay PWB cover Screw Hooks Hooks Connector FFC FFC connector with a lock 30ppm 35ppm is FFC connector without the lock FFC support porti...

Page 447: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 1 5 29 21 Remove the LSU retainer pins and the springs 22 Remove two screws each and then remove the LSU front holder Figure 1 5 49 Screw Spring LSU front holder Screw LSU retainer pin ...

Page 448: ...e removed parts When reconnecting FFCs be sure to insert the FFC all the way in with the FFC connector This is to avoid a lengthy servicing due to a possible error which could cause re disassembly and assembly 26 When replacing the new LSU proceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U469 Auto color registration correction see page 1 3 182 2 Performs maintenance mode U119 Setting the drum see pa...

Page 449: ...en Start Color registration begins Figure 1 5 51 Manual correction 5 Press Color Registration Manual Chart and then Ptint A chart is printed 6 Press Registration Read figures at MH 1 to 7 CH 1 to 7 YH 1 to 7 and MV 3 CV 3 YV 3 of the reference chart and enter the figure marked at the scale which the BK fine line is in line with the M C Y fine lines using the keys 7 Press Start after all values hav...

Page 450: ... YV 1 2 4 5 coincide within the range of 1 to A If they are within the range adjustment is complete If they are out of range proceed to step 11 Figure 1 5 54 If manual color registration has failed 11 If the balance between V 1 and V 5 is more than 2 scales sample 1 or less than 2 scales sample 2 perform the following steps Figure 1 5 55 The scale must be corresponding within the range of A from 1...

Page 451: ...es sample 1 rotate counterclockwise V 1 V 5 2 scales sample 2 rotate clockwise Number of rotation V 1 V 5 x 4 clicks 14 Refit the waste toner box tray as before and then close the front cover 15 Turn the main power switch off and on Correction automatically starts 16 Print a reference chart and verify the result Figure 1 5 56 Allen wrench Hexagon socket Hexagon socket Hexagon socket Hexagon socket...

Page 452: ...oner container each 3 Remove the waste toner box tray by lift ing upwards and from the right side Figure 1 5 57 4 Remove the screw and then open the connector cover 5 Remove the connector 6 Remove four fixed screws of inner unit Figure 1 5 58 2 1 Waste toner box tray Connector cover Screw Screw Screw Screw Connector Screw Inner unit Inner unit ...

Page 453: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 1 5 35 7 Release the lock by pushing the fixed levers at the right and left of inner unit 8 Remove the inner unit Figure 1 5 59 Inner unit Fixed lever ...

Page 454: ...ittle see page 1 5 41 3 Remove the inner unit see page 1 5 34 4 Close the toner supply shutter 5 Remove two connectors Figure 1 5 60 6 Pull out as one body the developer unit and the drum unit The developer unit becomes basic and the drum units are combined 7 Detach the developer unit while sup porting bottom Figure 1 5 61 Toner supply shutter Connectors Developer unit Developer unit Developer uni...

Page 455: ...olor registration correction see page 1 3 182 4 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 155 Figure 1 5 62 11 When replacing the new drum unit pro ceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U119 drum setup see page 1 3 86 2 Performs maintenance mode U140 AC calibration for 45 ppm 55 ppm model only see page 1 3 93 3 Performs maintenance mode U464 Calibration...

Page 456: ... lever 3 Check or replace the charger roller unit and refit all the removed parts When refitting the charger roller unit that must hook the hook certain by operating the MC lock lever after insert ing the charger roller unit until bumping 4 When replacing the new charger roller unit proceed as follows Performs maintenance mode U930 clearing the charger roller count see page 1 3 197 Figure 1 5 63 C...

Page 457: ... out 2 Remove three screws 3 Unhook three hooks and then remove the right front cover Figure 1 5 64 4 Unhook two hooks and then remove the conveying inner cover from the paper conveying unit Figure 1 5 65 Paper conveying unit Screw Screw Hook Hook Hook Right front cover Right front cover Conveying inner cover Hook Paper conveying unit Hook ...

Page 458: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 1 5 40 5 Remove four screws 6 Remove the paper conveying unit by lifting upward Figure 1 5 66 Paper conveying unit Paper conveying unit Screws Screws ...

Page 459: ...transfer belt unit Procedure 1 Remove the paper conveying unit see page 1 5 39 2 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 45 3 Remove the connector Figure 1 5 67 4 Pull out the transfer belt unit by lifting up both ends Figure 1 5 68 Connector Transfer belt unit ...

Page 460: ...d as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U469 Transfer belt speed correction see page 1 3 182 2 Performs maintenance mode U464 Calibration see page 1 3 175 3 Performs maintenance mode U469 Auto color registration correction see page 1 3 182 4 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 155 Figure 1 5 69 Transfer belt unit Transfer belt unit Transfer belt unit T...

Page 461: ...oosen two fixed screws on the TC guide 3 Remove the stop ring 4 Unhook the hook and remove the TC gear Z29R 5 Remove two bearings 6 Remove the transfer roller Figure 1 5 71 Paper conveying unit Screw Screw Transfer roller Transfer roller shaft Transfer roller shaft Stop ring Bearing Bearing TC gear Z29R Hook TC guide TC guide TC guide ...

Page 462: ...replacing the new transfer roller proceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U127 clearing the transfer counter see page 1 3 87 2 Performs maintenance mode U464 Calibration see page 1 3 175 3 Performs maintenance mode U469 Auto color registration correction see page 1 3 182 4 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 155 Figure 1 5 72 Ground plate Ground ...

Page 463: ...tion 1 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit Procedure 1 Pull out the paper conveying unit 2 Remove the screw and then the fuser wire cover 3 Remove two connectors Figure 1 5 73 Fuser wire cover Screw Connector Connector Paper conveying unit ...

Page 464: ...it pro ceed as follows 1 Performs maintenance mode U167 clearing the fuser count see page 1 3 105 2 Performs maintenance mode U464 Calibration see page 1 3 175 3 Performs maintenance mode U469 Auto color registration correction see page 1 3 182 4 Performs maintenance mode U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically see page 1 3 155 Figure 1 5 74 Screws M4 10 Screws M4 10 Fuser unit ...

Page 465: ...IH PWB cover see page 1 5 65 6 Remove the IH electric wire cover see page 1 5 65 7 Remove the wire holder 8 Release the wire saddle 9 Remove two connectors from the fuser IH PWB according to the following notes Confirm the power plug is removed from the outlet without fail when you remove the connector because a high current is supplied to fuser IH unit by this connector Confirm the connected conn...

Page 466: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 1 5 48 10 Remove two screws 11 Unhook the hook by lifting up the fuser IH unit a little and then remove it Figure 1 5 76 Screw Screw Fuser IH unit Fuser IH unit Hook Hook ...

Page 467: ... controller lid 3 Remove two screws 4 Unhook six hooks and then remove the left upper cover Figure 1 5 77 5 Release six wire saddles on the control ler box 6 Remove the wire holder Figure 1 5 78 Screws Controller lid Left upper cover Left upper cover Hooks Hooks Hook Wire holder Wire saddle Wire saddles Wire saddle Controller box Wire saddle ...

Page 468: ...d b When connecting the FFC that there is a projection in the terminal both sides lock by knocking down the lock lever after inserting the FFC to the connector until both projections are hidden see figure c Figure 1 5 79 Controller box State of lock Lock release FFC detaching State of lock Lock release FFC detaching Main PWB Main PWB FFC connection Lock a b c 1 1 FFC Lock lever Lock lever 2 Lock l...

Page 469: ...23 YC27 YC32 YC8 FFC connector with a lock YC9 YC1 BLACK with a lock YC2 BLUE with a lock When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever see page 1 5 50 Figure 1 5 81 Controller box Screws Hook Hook Screws Screw YC23 YC27 YC32 YC8 YC9 YC2 YC1 BLACK BLUE Controller box Main PWB Main PWB FFC connector with a lock ...

Page 470: ...Remove two wire holders 13 Remove two screws 14 Remove the fan motor holder Figure 1 5 82 15 Remove five screws from the main PWB Figure 1 5 83 Wire holder Wire holder Screws Fan mootor holder Controller box Wire saddle Screws Main PWB Main PWB Screw Screws ...

Page 471: ... parts When replacing the main PWB remove the following devices from the main PWB and then reattach it to the new main PWB EEPROM YC14 Code DIMM YS4 Memory DDR YS1 Exchange EEPROM YC14 and code DIMM YC4 by the set Figure 1 5 84 YS4 YC14 YS1 BLACK BLUE BK WH Main PWB Projections for ground Network connector Main PWB EEPROM YC14 Code DIMM YS4 Memory DDR YS1 Network connector ...

Page 472: ...onnector with a lock YC10 FFC connector with a lock YC26 YC9 YC8 YC46 FFC connector with a lock YC12 FFC connector with a lock YC15 YC16 YC18 YC17 YC19 YC20 YC21 YC22 YC45 When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever see page 1 5 50 Figure 1 5 85 YC26 YC4 YC2 YC45 YC22 YC21 YC20 YC46 YC8 YC9 YC10 YC7 YC19 YC18 YC16 YC15 YC12 YC...

Page 473: ...PWB 5 Check or replace the engine PWB and refit all the removed parts When replacing the engine PWB remove the EEPROM U100 from the engine PWB and then reattach it to the new engine PWB Figure 1 5 86 U100 Screws Hook Hook Screws Screws EEPROM U100 Engine PWB Engine PWB Engine PWB Engine PWB ...

Page 474: ...se six wire saddles 5 Remove the following eleven connec tors and three tabs from the power source PWB YC3 YC1 TB1 TB2 TB5 YC7 YC8 YC17 YC14 YC12 YC16 YC13 YC10 YC11 Figure 1 5 88 Wire saddle Wire saddle Waire saddle Connector Connector Connectors YC3 YC17 YC14 YC12 YC16YC13YC10 YC11 YC1 YC7 YC8 TB5 TB1 TB2 Power source assembly Power source PWB Power source PWB Wire saddle Wire saddles Wire saddl...

Page 475: ...elease the wire saddle 7 Remove the connector from the coin vender plate Figure 1 5 89 8 Remove two screws 9 Remove the power source assembly Figure 1 5 90 Wire saddle Connctor Coin vender plate Power source assembly Screw Screw ...

Page 476: ... 2LN 2LM 2LC 1 5 58 10 Remove eight screws 11 Remove the power source PWB 12 Check or replace the power source PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 91 Screws Screw Screws Screws Power source PWB ...

Page 477: ...e connectors from high volt age PWB Figure 1 5 92 4 Remove eight screws 5 Unhook two hooks of PWB spacer and then remove the high voltage PWB 1 6 Check or replace the high voltage PWB 1 and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 93 YC4 YC3 YC18 YC10 YC11 Connectors Connectors Connector High voltage PWB 1 High voltage PWB 1 Screws Screws Screw Screw PWB spacer High voltage PWB 1 Screws ...

Page 478: ...e see page 1 5 41 3 Remove two connectors from the high voltage PWB 2 assembly Figure 1 5 94 4 Remove two screws 5 Unhook two hooks and then remove the high voltage PWB 2 6 Check or replace the high voltage PWB 2 and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 95 Connectors High voltage PWB 2 assembly High voltage PWB 2 assembly High voltage PWB 2 assembly Screws Hook Hook ...

Page 479: ...onveying unit out 2 Remove the screw from the right upper cover Figure 1 5 96 3 Open the front cover 4 Remove the screw and then remove the fan cover 5 Unhook three hooks and then remove the front upper right cover Figure 1 5 97 Screw Right upper cover Fan cover Screw Front upper right cover Hooks ...

Page 480: ...2 6 Remove the screw and then remove the operation panel cover Figure 1 5 98 7 Remove two screws and then remove the USB wire connector Figure 1 5 99 Screw Operation panel cover Operation panel cover Screws USB wire connector ...

Page 481: ...ion panel unit upward 10 Release three wire saddles 11 Remove four connectors from the oper ation PWB 12 Remove the operation panel unit Figure 1 5 101 Screws Screws Waire saddles Connector Operation panel unit Operation panel unit Connectors Connector Wire saddle Operation PWB ...

Page 482: ...lock remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever see page 1 5 50 Figure 1 5 102 14 Remove four screws and then remove the operation PWB 15 Check or replace the operation PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 103 Connectors FFC connector with a lock FFC Operation PWB Connectors FFC Operation PWB Screws Screw Screw ...

Page 483: ...en screws and then remove the rear upper cover Figure 1 5 104 2 Remove eight screws 3 Release two hanging parts and then remove the rear lower cover 4 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 45 Figure 1 5 105 Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screw Screws Rear lower cover Screw Screw Screws Screws ...

Page 484: ...ve the screw and five hooks and then remove the right upper cover Figure 1 5 106 7 Remove the screw 8 Unhook two hooks and then remove the right middle rear cover Figure 1 5 107 ISU right cover Screws Right upper cover Screw Right upper cover Hooks Hook Hook Right middle rear cover Screw ...

Page 485: ...cover 10 Remove the IH electric wire cover Figure 1 5 108 11 Release two wire saddles 12 Remove four connectors from the fuser IH PWB Figure 1 5 109 Screws Screw Screw IH electric wire cover Fuser IH PWB cover Fuser IH PWB Wire saddle Wire saddle Connector Connectors Connector ...

Page 486: ...14 Remove the connector YC27 from feed PWB 1 Figure 1 5 110 15 Remove three screws 16 Unhook two hooks and then remove IH box assembly Figure 1 5 111 Wire holder Wire holder Feed PWB 1 Connector YC27 IH box assembly Hook Hook Screw Screws IH box assembly ...

Page 487: ... Remove six screws 19 Unhook the hook of the PWB spacer and then remove the fuser IH PWB 20 Check or replace the fuser IH PWB and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 112 PWB spacer Screws Screws Screws Connector IH box assembly Connector Fuser IH PWB ...

Page 488: ...Remove the connector 3 Release the wire saddle Figure 1 5 113 4 Remove three screws 5 Remove the drum drive unit K Do not have a shaft part alone when you carry drum drive unit K Have the housing Put support on the tip of the shaft so that the shaft may become the horizon tal when you put drum drive unit K on the table etc Figure 1 5 114 Connector Wire saddle Screws Screw Screw Screws Drum drive u...

Page 489: ...page 1 5 49 7 Remove the left cover see page 1 5 25 8 Remove the connector 9 Remove the screw Figure 1 5 115 10 Remove as one body the toner unit duct the toner fan motor 1 and the toner fan motor 2 Figure 1 5 116 Connector Screw Screw Screw Toner fan motor 1 Toner fan motor 2 Toner unit duct ...

Page 490: ...rive unit MCY Have the housing Put support on the tip of the shaft so that the shaft may become the horizon tal when you put drum drive unit MCY on the table etc 14 Check or replace the drum drive unit K and the drum drive unit MCY and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 118 Connector Connector Connector Wire saddle 45 ppm model 55 ppm model only Wire saddle 45 ppm 55 ppm 30 ppm 35 ppm Screw Sc...

Page 491: ...70 2 Release three wire saddles on the main drive unit 3 Remove two connectors Figure 1 5 119 4 Remove five screws 5 Remove the main drive unit 6 Check or replace the main drive unit and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 120 Wire saddle Wire saddles Connector Connector Main drive unit Main drive unit Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Main drive unit ...

Page 492: ... from the feed PWB 1 YC18 YC19 YC20 YC27 YC26 YC3 YC17 YC14 YC10 YC16 YC13 YC12 YC23 YC25 YC15 YC11 YC5 YC4 YC1 FFC connector with a lock YC2 FFC connector with a lock When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever see page 1 5 50 Figure 1 5 122 Wire holder Wire holder Wire saddle Wire holder Feed PWB 1 assembly Wire holder Wire ...

Page 493: ...n removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever see page 1 5 50 Figure 1 5 123 6 Remove three screws 7 Remove the feed PWB 1 assembly Figure 1 5 124 Engine PWB FFC connector with a lock YC4 FFC FFC connector with a lock YC1 Feed PWB 2 Screw Screw Screw Feed PWB 1 assembly Screw Screw Screw Feed PWB 1 assembly ...

Page 494: ... transfer belt unit a little see page 1 5 41 12 Release the clamp 13 Remove the connector 14 Remove three screws 15 Remove the transfer drive unit Figure 1 5 126 Fuser drive unit Fuser drive unit Connector Screw Screw Screw Transfer drive unit Connector Clamp Clamp Screw Screws Connector 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Screw Transfer drive unit Screws Transfer drive unit ...

Page 495: ...e unit 16 Remove three wire holders from the feed 2 FFC guide Figure 1 5 127 17 Remove two screws and then remove the feed 2 FFC guide Figure 1 5 128 Wire holder Wire holders Feed 2 FFC guide Feed 2 FFC guide Screw Screw Feed 2 FFC guide Screw Screw ...

Page 496: ...C11 YC7 YC8 YC3 YC5 YC6 YC13 YC12 Figure 1 5 129 19 Remove three screws 20 Remove the feed drive unit Figure 1 5 130 YC11 YC7 YC8 YC5 YC6 YC10 YC3 YC12 YC13 Feed PWB 2 Feed PWB 2 Feed drive unit 30ppm 35ppm Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw 45ppm 55ppm Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw ...

Page 497: ...ect the connector yellow to the connector of paper feed clutch 1 on stamp YELLOW side as before when removing the connector of the paper feed clutch as the check of the feed drive unit etc Figure 1 5 131 Feed drive unit Connector Yellow Connector Paper feed clutch 1 Marking YELLOW Paper feed clutch 2 ...

Page 498: ...r lower cover see page 1 5 65 2 Remove the power source assembly see page 1 5 56 3 Remove the connector each 4 Remove two screws each 5 Remove the lift motor 1 and 2 6 Check or replace the lift motor and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 132 Screws Connector Lift motor Lift motor 1 Lift motor 2 ...

Page 499: ...e eject filter Procedure 1 Unhook the hook each and remove two eject filter units 2 Remove the eject filter from the eject cover 3 Clean or replace the eject filter and refit the filter Figure 1 5 133 Eject filter units Hook Eject filter Eject cover Hook ...

Page 500: ...Detaching and refitting the toner filter Procedure 1 Remove the toner filter unit while grip ping the levers 2 Clean or replace the toner filter unit and refit the filter Figure 1 5 134 Toner filter unit Levers Toner filter unit ...

Page 501: ...3 3 Detaching and refitting the fan filter Procedure 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the fan filter by releasing the lever 3 Clean the fan filter 4 Refit the fan filter Figure 1 5 135 Front cover Fan filter Fan filter Lever ...

Page 502: ... refitting the transfer belt filter Procedure 1 Remove two transfer belt filters by releasing the lever 2 Clean the transfer belt filter 3 Refit the transfer belt filter Figure 1 5 136 Transfer belt filters Transfer belt filter Lever Lever ...

Page 503: ...5 Detaching and refitting the DU filter Procedure 1 Open the MP tray 2 Remove two DU filters by releasing the lever 3 Clean the DU filter 4 Refit the DU filter Figure 1 5 137 DU filter MP tray DU filter DU filter Lever Lever ...

Page 504: ...aching and refitting the left filter Procedure 1 Remove the left filter cover by releasing the lever 2 Remove the left filter 3 Clean or replace the left filter and refit the filter Figure 1 5 138 Left filter cover Left filter Lever ...

Page 505: ...rform maintenance mode U917 backup data reading see page 1 3 193 2 Remove the rear upper cover see page 1 5 65 3 Release the wire saddle 4 Remove two screws Figure 1 5 139 5 Unhook two hooks and pull out the HDD bracket a little Figure 1 5 140 Screws Wire saddle HDD bracket Hook Hook ...

Page 506: ...dure 1 Connects to the machine the USB memory that preserved Software LANGUAGE BR JP Opt Font Opt Msg and the PDF1 7 resource The firmware is installed by switching the main power switch to ON OFF 2 Connects to the machine the USB memory that preserved Weekly Timer FMU application Installs the firmware from the applica tion screen of the system menu Refer to operation guide 3 Perform maintenance m...

Page 507: ...wo screws and then remove the eject unit 5 Check or replace the eject unit and refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 143 Cautions on installing the eject unit When inserting the eject unit into the device use care that the eject unit does not get in con tact with the eject guide by keeping its actua tor lifted while inserting Figure 1 5 144 Eject unit Connector Screw Screw Actuator Eject guide ...

Page 508: ... 145 Eject rear fan motor Toner fan motor 2 Toner fan motor 2 Power source fan motor Belt fan motor 1 Belt fan motor 2 IH fan motor Fuser fan motor 1 Eject fan motor 1 Eject fan motor 2 Fuser fan motor 2 Fuser front fan motor Eject front fan motor Controller fan motor Fuser rear fan motor Intake Intake Intake Intake Intake Intake Intake Intake Exhaust Exhaust Exhaust Exhaust Exhaust ...

Page 509: ...able from the wall outlet 3 Insert the USB memory in which the firmware has been written into a notch hole of the machine 4 Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on Upgrading firmware starts blinking the memory LED Caution Never turn the main power switch off during upgrading 5 Completed is displayed on the touch panel when upgrading is complete Figure 1 6 1 6 Press the power key on...

Page 510: ...ve the EEPROM YC14 and code DIMM YS4 from the main PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new main PWB Figure 1 6 2 When refitting DIMM check CODE and FLS marked on the PWB and refit them to the original positions Figure 1 6 3 YC14 EEPROM Main PWB CODE FLS YS4 YS3 Main PWB DIMM ...

Page 511: ... to the PWB match BLACK and BLUE marked on the PWB with the connector colors Figure 1 6 4 When connecting the USB cables YC17 YC21 to the PWB match BK and WH marked on the PWB with the connector colors Figure 1 6 5 BLACK BLUE YC2 YC1 Main PWB BK WH YC21 YC17 Main PWB ...

Page 512: ... 6 4 1 6 3 Remarks on engine PWB replacement When replacing the engine PWB remove the EEPROM U100 from the engine PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new engine PWB Figure 1 6 6 U100 EEPROM Engine PWB ...

Page 513: ...ut of the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley paper feed pulley and separation pulley Figure 2 1 1 Cassette paper feed section 4 1 1 3 3 2 2 17 20 5 21 8 6 7 4 12 5 22 9 15 9 23 8 6 16 18 19 14 11 13 7 10 10 24 1 Cassette base 2 Cassette operation plate 3 Cassette 4 Forwarding pulleys 5 Paper feed pulleys 6 Separation pulleys 7 Assist rollers 8 Assist pulleys 9 Paper conveying roller...

Page 514: ...AS1_QUANT1 CAS1_QUANT2 CAS1_P0_SENS PGS1 U PGS1 L PFCL2 ASCL2 FS2 PUSOL2 LM2 PS2 LS2 CAS2_EMPTY_SENS PICK_SOL2_REM PICK_SOL2_RET LIFT_MOT2_RET LIFT_MOT2_DR CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS CAS2_QUANT1 CAS2_QUANT2 FEED2_SENS V FEED_CL_REM FEED_CL2_REM ASIST_CL2 CAS2_P0_SENS YC10 1 YC8 14 YC8 15 YC8 18 YC8 21 YC3 15 YC3 16 YC3 25 YC3 28 YC4 3 YC12 1 YC6 3 YC5 3 YC1 YC4 YC3 22 YC8 23 YC4 1 YC8 11 YC8 2 YC8 3 YC8 6 ...

Page 515: ... time by the torque lim iter Figure 2 1 3 MP tray paper feed section 1 2 7 9 6 4 13 5 11 14 12 10 8 15 3 1 MP forwarding pulley 2 MP paper feed pulley 3 MP separate pulley 4 MP table 5 MP support Tray 6 MP paper sensor MPPS 7 Actuator MP paper sensor 8 MP lift sensor 1 MPLS1 9 MP lift sensor 2 MPLS2 10 MP paper length switch MPPLSW 11 Actuator MP paper length switch 12 MP paper width switch MPPWSW...

Page 516: ...1 EPWB YC3 5 MPPS MPF_PPR_SET MPF_CL_REM MPF_LIFT_DR_B MPF_LIFT_DR_A MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG MPF_TABLE MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS YC3 3 YC3 13 MPLS2 MPPLSW MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS YC3 8 MPFS MPF_JAM_SENS YC3 11 YC3 11 YC3 11 YC2 7 YC2 5 YC2 4 YC2 2 YC2 9 MPPWSW MPTSW MPLM MP PFCL YC12 YC17 YC1 YC6 ...

Page 517: ... roller to the position where the registration sensor RS is turned on and then sent to the transfer separation section by the right registration roller and left registration roller Figure 2 1 5 Paper conveying section 3 4 5 8 7 6 2 9 1 1 Middle roller 2 Middle pulley 3 Left registration roller 4 Right registration roller 5 Paper conveying pulley 6 Middle sensor MS 7 Regist deflection sensor RDS 8 ...

Page 518: ...lock diagram 30 ppm 35 ppm model RDS BEND_SENS YC7 5 REG_SENS YC7 12 FFED1_SENS YC8 9 RS MS RCL REG_CL_REM YC22 2 MCL MID_CL_REM YC7 14 6 5 4 3 PFM FEED_MOT_REM FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_DIR YC2 5 YC2 4 YC2 3 YC2 2 YC1 YC4 YC5 42 YC2 9 EPWB FPWB2 FPWB1 ...

Page 519: ...ND_SENS YC7 5 REG_SENS YC7 12 FFED1_SENS YC8 9 RS MS MM MID_A YC7 2 MID_B YC7 1 MID_A YC7 4 MID_B YC7 3 RM REG_MOT_A YC25 2 REG_MOT_B YC25 1 REG_MOT_A YC25 4 REG_MOT_B YC25 3 6 5 4 3 PFM FEED_MOT_REM FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_DIR YC2 5 YC2 4 YC2 3 YC2 2 YC1 YC4 YC5 42 YC2 9 EPWB FPWB2 FPWB1 ...

Page 520: ...ing section consists of the cleaning blade and the cleaning roller which remove residual toner from the drum surface after transfer The cleaning lamp CL consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging Figure 2 1 8 Drum section 1 7 10 6 2 3 8 9 5 4 1 Drum 2 Charger roller 3 Charger cleaning roller 4 Charger case 5 Drum frame 6 Cleaning blade 7 Cleaning roller 8 Control...

Page 521: ... Y EEP_SCL EEP_SDA EEPROM ERS_C_REM DRPWB C EEP_SCL EEP_SDA EEPROM ERS_M_REM DRPWB M EEP_SCL EEP_SDA EEPROM ERS_K_REM DRPWB K EEP_SCL EEP_SDA LD CW CCW START STOP CLOCK EEPROM DRM K 6 5 4 3 LD CW CCW START STOP CLOCK DRM Y 6 5 4 3 LD CW CCW START STOP CLOCK DRM C 45 ppm 55 ppm model only 1 30 ppm 35 ppm model 2 45 ppm 55 ppm model 6 5 4 3 LD CW CCW START STOP CLOCK DRM M 2 DRM MCY 1 Main chager hi...

Page 522: ...er screws that agitate the toner Also the toner sensor TS checks whether or not toner remains in the developer unit Figure 2 1 10 Developer section 2 6 1 9 7 8 5 3 4 2 6 1 9 30 ppm 35 ppm model 45 ppm 55 ppm model 7 8 5 3 4 1 Sleeve roller 2 Magnet roller 3 Developer screw A 4 Developer screw B 5 Developer blade 6 Developer case 7 Developer cover 8 Magnet cover 9 Toner sensor TS ...

Page 523: ..._M TN_CLK EEP_SDA EEP_SCL YC11 1 YC11 2 YC11 3 YC11 4 YC11 8 YC11 9 YC11 12 VIB_MOT VM K TPD_TEMP VCONT TPD_K TN_CLK EEP_SDA EEP_SCL YC9 1 YC9 2 YC9 3 YC9 4 YC9 8 YC9 9 YC9 12 VIB_MOT FRPWB MCPWB EPWB YC10 YC2 YC3 YC9 YC7 9 YC7 10 YC7 11 YC7 12 YC7 2 YC7 3 YC7 4 YC7 5 LD CW CCW START STOP CLOCK LD CW CCW START STOP CLOCK 6 5 4 3 6 5 4 3 DEVM K DRM MCY Magnet bias Y Sleeve bias Y Developer unit Y D...

Page 524: ...o an electrical signal The mirror frame A and B travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side The speed of the mirror frame B is half the speed of the mirror frame A Figure 2 1 12 Image scanner section 3 9 4 11 15 13 12 6 5 7 10 8 6 14 2 1 1 Mirror frame A 2 Mirror frame B 3 LED mount 4 Scanner reflector 5 Mirror A 6 Mirror B 7 ISU lens 8 CCD PW...

Page 525: ...am Reading image data SM CCDPWB ISCPWB MPWB YC2 HP_SW ORG_SW SMOT_AP SMOT_BP SMOT_AN SMOT_BN SDA SCL VSET POW CO_SW YC8 3 YC13 2 YC3 YC11 YC4 YC25 YC5 1 YC9 YC5 2 YC5 3 YC5 4 YC6 3 YC6 4 YC6 5 YC6 9 YC14 3 CCD image sensor LLPWB ODSW HPS OSS Lens Image scanner unit Original ...

Page 526: ... over the drum Various lenses and mirror are housed in the laser scanner unit adjust the diameter of the laser beam and focalize it at the drum surface Also the LSU cleaning motor LSUCM is activated to conduct automatically cleaning of the LSU dust shield glass Figure 2 1 14 Laser scanner section 8 6 7 5 1 2 3 4 1 Polygon motor PM 2 f θ lens A 3 Mirror A 4 Mirror B 5 f θ lens B 6 Mirror C 7 LSU du...

Page 527: ...TA_2N_M YC8 25 YC8 26 YC8 28 YC1 6 YC1 5 YC1 3 DATA_2P_M YC8 29 YC1 2 REM_M LOCK_M YC7 3 YC7 4 3 2 CLK_M YC7 5 1 APC PWB C BD_C LSU_TH_C PDPWB C Laser scanner unit C PM C TH BD LDD_CS_C YC10 2 YC10 3 YC10 9 YC1 29 YC1 28 YC1 22 DATA_1N_C DATA_1P_C DATA_2N_C YC10 25 YC10 26 YC10 28 YC1 6 YC1 5 YC1 3 DATA_2P_C YC10 29 YC1 2 REM_C LOCK_C YC9 3 YC9 4 3 2 CLK_C YC9 5 1 APC PWB Y BD_Y LSU_TH_Y PDPWB Y L...

Page 528: ...rame the toner density on the transfer belt is measured The transfer cleaning unit collects toner remaining on the transfer belt after secondary transfer and forwards it as waste toner to the waste toner box Figure 2 1 16 Intermediate transfer unit section 16 11 8 15 1 10 13 7 17 18 19 6 2 5 4 3 9 12 2 14 2 20 1 Drive roller 2 Backup roller 3 Primary transfer roller K 4 Primary transfer roller M 5...

Page 529: ...3 A3 YC3 A4 YC3 A5 YC3 A6 3 4 5 6 YC3 A7 ZIG_DR_CCW ZIG_DR_CW YC3 A12 YC3 A13 7 6 5 4 3 YC13 1 YC10 14 YC10 15 YC10 11 YC10 12 YC10 6 YC10 7 YC13 2 YC13 3 YC13 4 YC13 5 TR_BRK TR_DIR TR_RDY REG_SENS_F_P REG_SENS_F_S TR_CLK TR_REM TRBLS TRPWB TRCM CRM DCM TRM IDS1 REG_SENS_R_P REG_SENS_R_S IDS2 CLN_SOL_REM CLN_SOL_RET CLSOL DES DCS CRS Primary transfer bias Y Primary transfer bias C Primary transfe...

Page 530: ...r roller DC bias is applied from the high voltage PWB 2 HVPWB2 The toner image formed on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper by the potential differ ence and the paper is separated by curvature separation Figure 2 1 18 Secondary transfer roller section 2 5 3 1 6 4 1 Secondary transfer roller 2 Separation brush 3 Secondary transfer frame 4 Transfer guide 5 Transfer release sensor TRRS 6 T...

Page 531: ...m Secondary transfer bias Separation bias Secondary transfer roller Separation brush HVPWB2 RYPWB FPWB1 EPWB SP_REM T2_REM YC8 5 YC8 6 YC1 7 PRS_REM1 YC6 49 YC1 16 PRS_REM2 YC6 50 YC1 15 PRS_SENS YC6 51 YC1 14 YC1 8 YC14 YC1 TRRS PRS_REM2 PRS_SENS PRS_REM1 YC 14 5 YC 14 2 YC 14 4 TRRM ...

Page 532: ...fuser press spring The surface temperature of heat roller and press roller are detected by the fuser thermistor FTH and controlled by the engine PWB EPWB Figure 2 1 20 Fuser section 4 9 8 7 2 3 5 3 4 15 6 11 12 16 1 13 14 10 1 Heat roller Fuser belt 2 Press roller 3 IH coils 4 Side core 5 Arch core 6 Separators 7 Right fuser cover 8 Fuser eject roller 9 Fuser eject pulley 10 Loop sensor LPS 11 Fus...

Page 533: ... 21 5 YC6 20 START STOP YC6 18 YC18 4 YC18 2 YC18 3 YC18 5 YC1 46 YC1 44 YC1 45 YC1 47 YC3 2 3 YC4 1 YC5 1 YC1 9 4 3 Fuser unit FUBLS FSR_BLT_PLS GUIDE_TH MAIN_TH1 2 EDGE_TH YC26 A19 MAIN_TH1 2 YC26 B16 17 FSR_RLS_DR_CCW YC26 A12 YC26 A16 YC26 A13 YC26 B9 FSR_RLS_DR_CW YC26 A11 FURS FURM FSR_RLS_SENS FUES FSR_SIZE_SENS PRESS_TH YC26 YC4 YC1 5 6 GUIDE_TH YC26 B15 YC1 7 EDGE_TH YC26 B11 FUM ...

Page 534: ...x conveying section or job separator Figure 2 1 22 Eject Feed shift section 7 4 3 10 2 6 12 13 14 5 11 1 8 9 1 Middle pulley 2 Eject roller 3 Eject pulley 4 Eject roller 5 Eject pulley 6 Upper duplex roller 7 Duplex pulley 8 Lower duplex roller 9 Lower change guide 10 Upper change guide 11 Eject full sensor EFS 12 Actuator eject full sensor 13 Switchback sensor SBS 14 Actuator switchback sensor ...

Page 535: ...e 2 1 23 Eject Feed shift section block diagram SBS EXIT_FEED_SENS YC5 13 YC5 20 YC5 19 EFS EXIT_PAP_SENS YC5 16 JUNC_SOL_REM JUNC_SOL_RET FSSOL EM SB_CORE_A YC5 9 SB_CORE_B YC5 8 SB_CORE_A YC5 11 SB_CORE_B YC5 10 YC3 YC7 EPWB FRPWB ...

Page 536: ...eject feedshift section to the paper feed conveying section when duplex printing Figure 2 1 24 Duplex conveying section 6 1 3 4 5 4 4 5 2 8 9 7 1 Upper duplex roller 2 Middle duplex roller 3 Lower duplex roller 4 Duplex pulleys A 5 Duplex pulleys B 6 Duplex sensor 1 DUS1 7 Actuator duplex sensor 1 8 Duplex sensor 2 DUS2 9 Actuator duplex sensor 2 ...

Page 537: ...uplex conveying section block diagram 30 ppm 35 ppm model DUS1 DU_ENTER_SENS YC11 2 DUS2 DU_SENS YC9 2 DUCL1 DU_CL1_REM YC11 9 DUCL2 RYPWB YC23 1 YC14 5 YC23 4 YC1 YC6 YC2 YC5 YC13 12 YC1 14 YC13 9 DU_CL2_REM YC7 2 YC14 12 YC1 7 FPWB1 EPWB ...

Page 538: ...ENS YC11 2 DUS2 DU_SENS YC9 2 DUM1 DU1_A YC16 2 DU1_B YC16 1 DU1_A YC16 4 DU1_B YC16 3 DUM2 DU2_A YC7 6 DU2_B YC7 5 DU2_A YC7 8 DU2_B YC7 7 RYPWB YC23 1 YC14 5 YC23 7 YC23 6 YC23 9 YC23 8 YC14 15 YC14 14 YC14 17 YC1 YC6 YC2 YC5 YC14 16 YC13 12 YC1 14 YC13 6 YC13 7 YC13 4 YC13 5 YC1 4 YC1 5 YC1 2 YC1 3 FPWB1 EPWB ...

Page 539: ... source input switching for converting to 24 V DC and 12 V DC for output Controls the fuser IH 4 High voltage PWB 1 HVPWB1 Generates main charging and developer bias 5 High voltage PWB 2 HVPWB2 Generates transfer bias and separation bias 6 ISC PWB ISCPWB Controls the scanner section 7 CCD PWB CCDPWB Reads the image of originals 8 LED lamp PWB LLPWB Exposes originals 9 Operation PWB 1 OPWB1 Control...

Page 540: ...C APCPWB C Generates and controls the laser beam cyan 21 APC PWB Y APCPWB Y Generates and controls the laser beam yellow 22 PD PWB K PDPWB K Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam black 23 PD PWB M PDPWB M Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam magenta 24 PD PWB C PDPWB C Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam cyan 25 PD PWB Y PDPWB Y Controls horizo...

Page 541: ...11 Operation PWB 3 OPWB3 PARTS PWB OPERATION LED ASSY SP 12 Front PWB FRPWB PARTS PWB FRONT CLR ASSY SP 13 Feed PWB 1 FPWB1 PARTS PWB FEED 1 ASSY SP 14 Feed PWB 2 FPWB2 PARTS PWB FEED 2 ASSY SP 15 Relay PWB RPWB PARTS PWB JUNCTION ASSY SP 16 Motor control PWB MCPWB PARTS PWB MOTOR CONTROL ASSY SP 17 LSU relay PWB LSURPWB PARTS PWB LSU JUNC CLR ASSY SP 18 APC PWB K APCPWB K 19 APC PWB M APCPWB M 20...

Page 542: ...uge cassette 2 10 Paper gauge sensor 2 L PGS2 L Detects the paper gauge cassette 2 11 Paper length switch 1 PLSW1 Detects the length of paper cassette 1 12 Paper length switch 2 PLSW2 Detects the length of paper cassette 2 13 Paper width switch 1 PWSW1 Detects the width of paper cassette 1 14 Paper width switch 2 PWSW2 Detects the width of paper cassette 2 15 Feed sensor 1 FS1 Detects a paper misf...

Page 543: ...eparation of primary transfer rollers M C and Y 42 Transfer belt sensor TRBLS Detects positioning of transfer belt rotation 43 Transfer skew sensor TRSS Detects skew of transfer belt center position 44 Transfer edge sensor TRES Detects edge position of the transfer belt 45 Transfer release sensor TRRS Detects separation of secondary transfer roller 46 Loop sensor LPS Detects a paper misfeed Contro...

Page 544: ...motor Y PM Y Drives the polygon mirror Y 10 Registration motor RM 2 Drives the registration section 11 Middle motor MM 2 Drives the paper conveying section 12 Drum motor K DRM K Drives the drum unit K 13 Drum motor M DRM M 2 Drives the drum unit M 14 Drum motor C DRM C 2 Drives the drum unit C Drum motor MCY DRM MCY 1 Drives the drum units M C and Y 15 Drum motor Y DRM Y 2 Drives the drum unit Y 1...

Page 545: ...ng motor LSUCM Drives LSU dust shield glass cleaning system 27 Waste toner motor WTM Drives waste toner system 28 Transfer motor TRM Drives the transfer section 29 Transfer cleaning motor TRCM Drives the transfer cleaning section 30 Color release motor CRM Drives separation of primary transfer rollers M C and Y 31 Transfer skew motor TRSM Drives skew of transfer tension roller 32 Transfer release ...

Page 546: ... Cools the transfer belt section 9 Belt fan motor 2 BLFM2 Cools the transfer belt section 10 Fuser edge fan motor 1 FUEFM1 Cools the fuser section edge 11 Fuser edge fan motor 2 FUEFM2 Cools the fuser section edge 12 Fuser front fan motor FUFFM Cools the fuser section front side 13 Fuser rear fan motor FURFM Cools the fuser section rear side 14 Eject front fan motor EFFM Cools the eject section fr...

Page 547: ...1 EFM1 Cools the eject section 19 Eject fan motor 2 EFM2 Cools the eject section 20 IH fan motor IHFM Cools the fuser IH PWB 21 Power source fan motor PSFM Cools the power source section 22 Controller fan motor CONFM Cools the controller section ...

Page 548: ...ols the secondary paper feed 9 Duplex clutch 1 DUCL1 1 Controls the drive of duplex section 10 Duplex clutch 2 DUCL2 1 Controls the drive of duplex section 11 Pickup solenoid 1 PUSOL1 2 Controls the pickup roller cassette 1 12 Pickup solenoid 2 PUSOL2 2 Controls the pickup roller cassette 2 13 Feedshift solenoid FSSOL Controls the feedshift guide 14 Cleaning solenoid CLSOL Controls the ID sensor c...

Page 549: ...H FIH Heats the heat roller fuser belt 20 Fuser thermostat FTS Prevents overheating of the heat roller fuser belt 21 Cassette heater CH Dehumidifies the cassette section option 22 Hard disk HDD Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode 1 30 ppm model 35 ppm model only 2 45 ppm model 55 ppm model only ...

Page 550: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 2 12 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 551: ... BLACK BLUE CODE FLS BK WH YC13 U112 U113 U45 YC10 U1 YS4 YS3 YC25 YC11 YC30 YC7 YC33 YC23 YC27 YC32 YC24 YC8 YC9 YC3 YC2 YC15 YC18 YC20 U25 YC5 YC12 YC21 YC17 YC16 YC14 BAT1 YS2 YS1 YC1 U6 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 7 1 7 40 72 1 80 1 1 1 5 13 50 1 72 8 1 3 2 1 5 1 5 1 1 1 200 1 1 5 200 10 12 9 1 1 15 6 8 7 6 ...

Page 552: ...ignal 5 HSYNC_CN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 6 HSYNC_CP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 7 HSYNC_DN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 8 HSYNC_DP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 9 VSYNC_AN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 10 VSYNC_AP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 11 VSYNC_BN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 12 VSYNC_BP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Imag...

Page 553: ...g nal 38 EG_SI O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 39 EG_SCLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Engine lock signal 40 SGND Ground YC5 1 TD1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data Connected to ethernet 2 TD1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 3 TD2 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 4 TD2 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 5 CT1 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power output 6 CT2 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power ...

Page 554: ...interface PWB 2 WAKEUP0 O 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 3 AUDIO0 I Analog Audio signal 4 GND Ground 5 USB_DP0 I O USB data signal 6 USB_DN0 I O USB data signal 7 VBUS0 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to IFPWB 8 GND Ground 9 RESET1 I 0 3 3 V DC Reset signal 10 WAKEUP1 O 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 11 AUDIO1 I Analog Audio signal 12 GND Ground 13 USB_DP1 I O USB data signal 14 USB_DN1 I O USB data signal 15 VBU...

Page 555: ...17 DRB5 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 18 DRB6 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 19 DRB7 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 20 GND Ground 21 DGB0 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 22 DGB1 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 23 DGB2 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 24 DGB3 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 25 DGB4 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 26 DGB5 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse...

Page 556: ...l 52 LA12 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 53 LA13 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 54 LA14 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 55 LA15 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 56 LA16 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 57 LA17 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 58 GND Ground 59 LD0 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 60 LD1 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 61 LD2 I O 0 3 3 V D...

Page 557: ...munication data signal 7 SC_SO I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 8 SC_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Scanner clock signal YC12 1 DEEP_POWERO N O 0 3 3 V DC Sleep return signal Connected to operation PWB 1 2 ENERGY_SAVE O 0 3 3 V DC Energy save signal 3 SUPND_POWER O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to OPWB1 4 LED_MEMORY_N O 0 3 3 V DC Memory LED control signal 5 LED_ATTENTION _N O 0 3 3 V DC Atte...

Page 558: ...dress bus signal 17 A3 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 18 A2 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 19 A1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 20 A0 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 21 D0 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 22 D1 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 23 D2 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 24 WP O 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 25 CD2 O 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 26 CD1 O ...

Page 559: ...l 48 D9 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 49 D10 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 50 GND Ground YC17 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output Connected to operation PWB 1 2 DATA I O USB data signal 3 DATA I O USB data signal 4 NC Not used 5 GND Ground YC20 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output Connected to USB 2 DATA I O USB data signal 3 DATA I O USB data signal 4 GND Ground YC21 1 VBUS O 5 V DC ...

Page 560: ...3 3 V DC Lock signal 4 GND Ground 5 RX0N I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Received data signal 6 RX0P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Received data signal 7 GND Ground YC27 1 GND Ground Connected to hard disk 1 2 5V_HDD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to HDD1 3 GND Ground YC30 1 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from OPWB1 Connected to operation PWB 1 2 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from OPWB1 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power from OPWB1 4 GND Ground 5 G...

Page 561: ... O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 4 SGND Ground 5 SDICLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 6 SDI I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 7 SGND Ground 8 SGND Ground 9 12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to FIRPWB 10 12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to FIRPWB Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 562: ...YC20 U100 U1 U13 U4 U8 YC47 YC46 YC50 YC8 YC9 YC10 YC7 YC19 YC18 YC16 YC15 YC12 YC6 YC3 YC1 YC27 YC4 YC5 YC11 YC48 YC17 A20 A1 B1 1 1 4 10 B20 A10 B10 A1 1 12 6 1 2 1 3 20 1 B19 B1 A1 1 40 1 40 1 40 1 1 40 1 50 11 22 12 1 12 A19 1 7 14 11 12 22 1 1 1 6 1 60 1 1 1 B16 B1 24 1 13 12 1 8 A1 A16 1 50 1 50 64 20 40 21 64 28 15 1 1 4 B1 ...

Page 563: ...ower to FRPWB 9 3 3V2 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to FRPWB 10 3 3V1 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to FRPWB YC3 A1 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TRCM Connected to transfer belt unit A2 GND Ground A3 ICL_MOT_REM I 0 3 3 V DC TRCM On Off A4 ICL_MOT_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse TRCM clock signal A5 ICL_MOT_RDY I 0 3 3 V DC TRCM ready signal A6 ICL_MOT_DIR O 0 3 3 V DC TRCM drive switch signal A7 RLS_MOT_DR O 0 ...

Page 564: ... to feed PWB 2 2 FEED_MOT_REM O 0 3 3 V DC PFM On Off 3 FEED_MOT_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse PFM clock signal 4 FEED_MOT_RDY I 0 3 3 V DC PFM ready signal 5 FEED_MOT_DIR O 0 3 3 V DC PFM drive switch signal 6 FEED_CL1_REM O 0 24 V DC PFCL1 On Off 7 FEED_CL2_REM O 0 24 V DC PFCL2 On Off 8 ASIST_CL2 O 0 24 V DC ASCL2 On Off 9 LIFT_MOT2_REM O 0 24 V DC LM2 On Off 10 GND Ground 11 LIFT_MOT1_REM 1 O 0 24 V ...

Page 565: ...ff 33 GND Ground 34 CAS1_EMPTY I 0 3 3 V DC PS1 On Off 35 PICK_SOL1_RET O 0 24 V DC PUSOL1 On Off RET 36 PICK_SOL1_REM O 0 24 V DC PUSOL1 On Off ACT 37 CAS2_P0 I 0 3 3 V DC FS2 On Off 38 CAS2_LIFT_UP I 0 3 3 V DC LS2 On Off 39 CAS2_EMPTY I 0 3 3 V DC PS2 On Off 40 PICK_SOL2_RET O 0 24 V DC PUSOL2 On Off RET 41 PICK_SOL2_REM O 0 24 V DC PUSOL2 On Off ACT 42 GND Ground 43 REG_SENS I 0 3 3 V DC RS On...

Page 566: ... I 0 3 3 V DC DUS1 On Off 12 TCON_SET Not used 13 GND Ground 14 TRANS_MOT_RE M O 0 3 3 V DC TRCM On Off 15 TRANS_MOT_CL K O 0 3 3 V DC pulse TRCM clock signal 16 TRANS_MOT_RD Y I 0 3 3 V DC TRCM ready signal 17 TRANS_MOT_DI R O 0 3 3 V DC TRCM drive switch signal 18 TRANS_MOT_BR K O 0 3 3 V DC TRCM break signal 19 GND Ground 20 DRM_MOT_BK_R EM Not used 21 DRM_MOT_BK_R DY Not used 22 DRM_MOT_BK_D I...

Page 567: ...LR_ RDY Not used 38 DLP_MOT_CLR_ DIR Not used 39 GND Ground 40 REG_MOT_PD O 0 3 3 V DC RM control signal 41 REG_MOT_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse RM clock signal 42 REG_MOT_REM CL O 0 3 3 V DC RM RCL On Off 43 GND Ground 44 IH_PWB_FAN_L O 0 24 V DC IHFM On Off 45 IH_PWB_FAN_H O 0 24 V DC IHFM On Off 46 IH_PWB_FAN_AL M I 0 3 3 V DC IHFM alarm signal 47 POWER_OFF O 0 3 3 V DC Power off signal 48 DRM_HEAT_R...

Page 568: ... EXIT_REAR_FAN _H O 0 24 V DC ERFM On Off 16 GND Ground 17 FSR_CL_REM Not used 18 FSR_MOT_REM O 0 3 3 V DC FUM On Off 19 FSR_MOT_CLK 0 3 3 V DC pulse FUM clock signal 20 FSR_MOT_RDY O 0 3 3 V DC FUM ready signal 21 FSR_MOT_DIR O 0 3 3 V DC FUM drive switch signal 22 FSR_MOT_BRK O 0 3 3 V DC FUM break signal 23 GND Ground 24 MPF_TABLE I 0 3 3 V DC MPTSW On Off 25 MPF_WID1 I 0 3 3 V DC MPPWSW On Off...

Page 569: ... V DC DUCSW On Off 48 DU_FAN Not used 49 PRESS_MOT_RE M1 O 0 24 V DC TRRM On Off 50 PRESS_MOT_RE M2 O 0 24 V DC TRRM On Off 51 PRESS_RLS_SE NS I 0 3 3 V DC TRRS On Off 52 DU_SENS I 0 3 3 V DC DUS2 On Off 53 BELT_JAM_SENS Not used 54 GND Ground 55 CLN_SOL_RET O 0 24 V DC CLSOL On Off RET 56 CLN_SOL_REM O 0 24 V DC CLSOL On Off ACT 57 REG_SENS_R_S I Analog IDS2 detection signal 58 REG_SENS_R_P I Ana...

Page 570: ...6 EXIT_PAPE_SEN S I 0 3 3 V DC EFS On Off 17 EXIT_FEED_SEN S I 0 3 3 V DC SBS On Off 18 SB_MOT_REM O 0 3 3 V DC EM On Off 19 SB_MOT_PH O 0 3 3 V DC EM control signal 20 SB_MOT_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EM clock signal 21 SB_MOT_PD O 0 3 3 V DC EM control signal 22 SB_MOT_DIR O 0 3 3 V DC EM drive switch signal 23 GND Ground 24 DLP_FAN_ Bk_H O 0 24 V DC DEVFM2 On Off 25 DLP_FAN_ Bk_L O 0 24 V DC DEVFM...

Page 571: ...o high voltage PWB 2 2 SGND Ground 3 SP_CNT O Analog Separation bias control voltage 4 T2_CNT O Analog Secondary transfer bias control volt age 5 SP_REM O 0 3 3 V DC Separation bias On Off 6 T_REM O 0 3 3 V DC Secondary transfer bias On Off 7 FB_CNT O 0 3 3 V DC Primary transfer cleaning bias On Off 8 T1_CNT_Bk O Analog Primary transfer bias K control volt age 9 T1_CNT_M O Analog Primary transfer ...

Page 572: ...ontrol signal 13 GND Ground 14 GND Ground 15 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MCPWB 16 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to MCPWB 17 BLT_BRAKE Not used 18 BLT_VM Not used 19 BLT_REM Not used 20 MOT_DATA_SET O 0 3 3 V DC MCPWB control signal 21 DRM_ON O 0 3 3 V DC MCPWB control signal 22 BLT_FG Not used YC10 1 GND Ground Connected to front PWB 2 DRM_INDEX_Bk I 0 3 3 V DC DRM K control signal 3 ERS_Bk O 0 24 V DC...

Page 573: ... 23 GND Ground 24 EEP_SDA1 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 25 GND Ground 26 TPD_Y_1 I Analog DEVPWB Y detection signal 27 DLP_VCONT_Y_ 1 O 0 3 3 V DC DEVPWB Y control signal 28 TPD_TEMP_Y I Analog Developer thermistor Y detection sig nal 29 ERS_Y O 0 24 V DC CL Y On Off 30 DRM_INDEX_Y I 0 3 3 V DC DRM Y control signal 31 FRONT_OPEN I 0 3 3 V DC FRCSW On Off 32 GND Ground 33 I2C_SCL O 0 3 3...

Page 574: ...und 13 DATA_4PBK LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal K P 14 DATA_4NBK LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal K N 15 SGND Ground 16 DATA_3PBK LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal K P 17 DATA_3NBK LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal K N 18 SGND Ground 19 DATA_2P_M LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal M P 20 DATA_2N_M LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal M N 21 SGN...

Page 575: ...ol signal 43 PALA_STG_P0_Y O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB Y control signal 44 INT_ST_Y O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB Y control signal 45 SGND Ground 46 EEPROM_CS_1_ BK I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB K EEPROM data signal 47 IDD_CS_1_BK O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB K control signal 48 EEPROM_CS_2_ BK I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB K EEPROM data signal 49 IDD_CS_2_BK O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB K control signal 50 EEPROM_CS_M I O 0 3 3 V DC pu...

Page 576: ...P3_B K O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB K control signal 12 CUALM_BK I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB K alarm signal 13 LSU_TH_BK I Analog LSU thermistor K detection signal 14 BD_BK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Horizontal synchronization signal K 15 SGND Ground 16 CLK_M O 0 3 3 V DC pulse PM M clock signal 17 LOCK_M I 0 3 3 V DC PM M lock signal 18 REM_M O 0 24 V DC PM M On Off 19 SGND Ground 20 DATA_1P_M LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Vi...

Page 577: ...larm signal 43 LSU_TH_C I Analog LSU thermistor C detection signal 44 BD_C I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Horizontal synchronization signal C 45 SGND Ground 46 CLK_Y O 0 3 3 V DC pulse PM Y clock signal 47 LOCK_Y I 0 3 3 V DC PM Y lock signal 48 REM_Y O 0 24 V DC PM Y On Off 49 SGND Ground 50 DATA_1P_Y LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal Y P 51 DATA_1N_Y LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal Y N 5...

Page 578: ...harger Y control signal 12 AC_MAG_CNT_Y O 0 3 3 V DC pulse AC magnet bias Y control voltage 13 AC_MAG_CLK_Y O 0 3 3 V DC pulse AC magnet bias Y clock signal 14 DC_REC_CNT O PWM DC bias Y control voltage 15 N C Not used 16 DC_REC_REM O PWM DC bias C control voltage 17 AC_MAG_CLK_C O 0 3 3 V DC pulse AC magnet bias C clock signal 18 AC_MAG_CNT_C O 0 3 3 V DC pulse AC magnet bias C control voltage 19...

Page 579: ...M DC charger roller K control signal 14 DISCHARGE_Bk I PWM Main charger K control signal 15 AC_SLV_CNT_Bk O 0 3 3 V DC pulse AC sleeve bias K clock signal 16 DC_MAG_CNT_B k O PWM DC sleeve bias K control voltage 17 DC_SLV_CNT_Bk O PWM DC magnet bias K control voltage 18 AC_SLV_CLK_Bk O PWM AC sleeve bias K control voltage 19 AC_MAIN_CNT_ Bk O PWM AC charger roller K control signal 20 MAIN_IDC_Bk O...

Page 580: ...1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TFM1 A14 TN_FAN2 O 0 24 V DC TFM2 On Off A15 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TFM2 A16 LVU_FAN1 Not used A17 24V1 Not used A18 LVU_FAN2 Not used A19 24V1 Not used B1 SIDE_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse PFMPWB clock signal side B2 SIDE_SDO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse PFMPWB serial communication data signal side B3 SIDE_SEL O 0 3 3 V DC PFMPWB select signal side B4 SIDE_SDI I 0 3 3 V DC p...

Page 581: ...AL_REM Not used 7 DECAL_PH Not used 8 DECAL_CLK Not used 9 DECAL_PD Not used 10 DECAL_DIR Not used 11 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BRSOL 12 EXIT_SOL_REM O 0 24 V DC BRSOL On Off ACT 13 EXIT_SOL_RET O 0 24 V DC BRSOL On Off RET 14 GND Ground 15 EXIT_COV_OPE N I 0 3 3 V DC BRECSW On Off 16 GND Ground 17 EXIT_SENS I 0 3 3 V DC BRES On Off 18 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to BRES 19 N C Not used 20 BRID...

Page 582: ...e fan motor 2 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PSFM YC23 1 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to coin vender Connected to coin vender 2 GND Ground 3 GND Ground 4 COIN_EN I 0 3 3 V DC Coin vender enable signal 5 FGND Ground 6 FEED_COUNT O 0 3 3 V DC Coin vender control signal 7 EJECT_COUNT O 0 3 3 V DC Coin vender control signal 8 COPYING_SIG O 0 3 3 V DC Coin vender control signal 9 TXD_COIN O 0 3 3 V DC ...

Page 583: ...trol signal B6 KEY2 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal B7 KEY1 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal B8 KEY0 O 0 3 3 V DC Key card control signal B9 GND Ground B10 COUNT O 0 3 3 V DC Key card count signal YC26 A1 EDGE_FAN_ALM I 0 3 3 V DC FUEFM2 alarm signal Connected to fuser unit and fuser IH PWB A2 EDGE_FAN O 0 24 V DC FUEFM2 On Off A3 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FUEFM2 A4 EDGE_FAN_ALM I 0...

Page 584: ...tection signal B12 GND Ground B13 GUIDE_TH1 Not used B14 GND Ground B15 GUIDE_TH2 I Analog FTH3 detection signal B16 MAIN_TH2 I Analog FTH1 detection signal B17 MAIN_TH1 I Analog FTH1 detection signal B18 GND Ground B19 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to BRFM B20 BRIDGE_FAN O 0 24 V DC BRFM On Off YC27 1 EEP_SDA2 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal Connected to RFID PWB toner motor K M C Y and sc...

Page 585: ...Image control signal 5 HSYNC_CN I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 6 HSYNC_CP I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 7 HSYNC_DN I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 8 HSYNC_DP I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 9 VSYNC_AN I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 10 VSYNC_AP I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 11 VSYNC_BN I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 12 VSYNC_BP I 0 3 3 ...

Page 586: ... signal 37 EG SDIR I 0 3 3 V DC Engine communication direction sig nal 38 EG_SI I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 39 EG_SCLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Engine lock signal 40 SGND Ground YC47 1 NC Not used Connected to fiery relay PWB 2 NC Not used 3 NC Not used 4 NC Not used 5 NC Not used 6 NC Not used 7 NC Not used 8 NC Not used 9 NC Not used 10 NC Not used 11 NC Not used 12 SGND Ground...

Page 587: ... V DC pulse Image control signal 30 VSYNC_BN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 31 VSYNC_AP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 32 VSYNC_AN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 33 HSYNC_DP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 34 HSYNC_DN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 35 HSYNC_CP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 36 HSYNC_CN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 37 ...

Page 588: ... source PWB 30 ppm model 35 ppm model Figure 2 3 3 Power source PWB silk screen diagram 30 ppm model 35 ppm model YC3 YC1 YC12 YC11 YC9 YC13 YC10 YC7 YC8 YC6 YC14 YC4 YC5 TB1 TB2 TB3 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 1 1 1 3 1 6 4 6 8 8 3 4 1 2 1 1 6 4 3 ...

Page 589: ...fuser IH PWB 2 NC Not used 3 IH_LIVE O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to IHPWB YC5 1 DH_LIVE O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to CH Connected to cassette heater 2 DH_LIVE O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to CH 3 NC Not used 4 NC Not used 5 DH_NEUTRAL O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to CH 6 DH_NEUTRAL O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to CH YC6 1 DH_LIVE O 120 V A...

Page 590: ...8 GND Ground YC10 1 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to paper feeder large capacity feeder Connected to paper feeder large capac ity feeder 1000 sheet 4000 sheet finisher and ISC PWB 2 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to paper feeder large capacity feeder 3 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to 1000 sheet 4000 sheet finisher 4 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to 1000 sheet 4000 sheet finisher 5 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V ...

Page 591: ...0 3 3 V DC Sleep mode signal On Off Connected to feed PWB 1 2 DRUM_HEAT_RE M I 0 3 3 V DC FH On Off 3 GND Ground 4 FSR_RELAY_RE M I 0 3 3 V DC Power relay signal On Off YC14 1 12V1 O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to MPWB Connected to main PWB 2 12V1 O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to MPWB 3 12V1 O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to MPWB 4 12V1 O 12 V DC 12 V DC power to MPWB 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 GND Ground 8 GND Gro...

Page 592: ...odel Figure 2 3 4 Power source PWB silk screen diagram 45 ppm model 55 ppm model YC3 YC2 YC1 YC5 YC15 YC14 YC12 YC16 YC13 YC10 YC11 YC9 YC17 YC18 YC7 YC8 YC4 TB4 TB3 TB1 TB2 TB5 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 1 1 1 3 1 6 4 6 8 8 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 6 4 4 4 2 2 3 ...

Page 593: ...PWB Connected to fuser IH PWB 2 NC Not used 3 IH_LIVE O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to IHPWB YC8 1 DH_LIVE O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to CH Connected to cassette heater 2 DH_LIVE O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to CH 3 NC Not used 4 NC Not used 5 DH_NEUTRAL O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to CH 6 DH_NEUTRAL O 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output to CH YC9 1 ...

Page 594: ... 8 GND Ground YC13 1 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to paper feeder large capacity feeder Connected to paper feeder large capac ity feeder 1000 sheet 4000 sheet finisher and ISC PWB 2 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to paper feeder large capacity feeder 3 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to 1000 sheet 4000 sheet finisher 4 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to 1000 sheet 4000 sheet finisher 5 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V...

Page 595: ...d 6 GND Ground 7 GND Ground 8 GND Ground YC16 1 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB1 Connected to high voltage PWB 1 2 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB1 3 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB1 4 PGND Ground 5 PGND Ground 6 PGND Ground YC17 1 POWER_OFF I 0 3 3 V DC Sleep mode signal On Off Connected to feed PWB 1 2 DRUM_HEAT_RE M I 0 3 3 V DC FH On Off 3 GND Ground Connector Pin Signal I O ...

Page 596: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 3 46 2 3 4 ISC PWB Figure 2 3 5 ISC PWB silk screen diagram YC5 YC14 YC2 YC1 YC13 YC9 YC6 YC11 YC7 YC12 YC8 YC3 YC4 4 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 1 40 1 11 1 6 1 1 3 1 8 7 1 1 16 6 3 5 ...

Page 597: ...3 V DC pulse Transmission data signal 7 GND Ground YC5 1 SMOT AP O 0 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal Connected to scanner motor 2 SMOT BP O 0 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal 3 SMOT AN O 0 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal 4 SMOT BN O 0 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal YC6 1 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LLPWB Connected to LED lamp PWB 2 FAIL I 0 3 3 V DC Error signal 3 SDA I O 0...

Page 598: ...se Serial communication data signal 15 AFECLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 16 GND Ground 17 DIS_CIS_1P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 18 DIS_CIS_1N I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 19 GND Ground 20 DIS_CIS_2P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 21 DIS_CIS_2N I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 22 GND Ground 23 DIS_CIS_3P I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image data signal 24 DIS_CIS_3N I 0 3 3 V D...

Page 599: ...DP_TMG I 0 3 3 V DC DPTS On Off 3 DP_RDY I 0 3 3 V DC ready signal 4 DP_SEL O 0 3 3 V DC Select signal 5 DP_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 6 DP_SO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 7 DP_SI I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 8 DP_OPEN I 0 3 3 V DC DPOCSW On Off 9 Reserve Not used 10 GND Ground 11 GND Ground 12 GND Ground 13 Reserve Not used 14 24V2 O 24 V DC ...

Page 600: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 3 50 YC14 1 3 3V O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to ODSW Connected to original detection switch 2 GND Ground 3 CO_SW I 0 3 3 V DC ODSW On Off Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 601: ...M 2LC 2 3 51 2 3 5 Operation PWB 1 Figure 2 3 6 Operation PWB 1 silk screen diagram YC1 YC9 YC6 YC8 YC12 YC5 YC10 SW1 YC13 YC14 YC11 YC3 YC2 YC15 YC4 1 1 1 1 1 4 12 1 1 4 1 1 2 9 5 1 4 20 12 1 5 1 12 1 40 1 15 6 ...

Page 602: ...ot used 3 BEEP_POWERO N I 0 3 3 V DC Sleep return signal 4 ENERGY_SAVE I 0 3 3 V DC Energy save signal 5 SUPND_POWER I 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power from MPWB 6 LED_MEMORY_N I 0 3 3 V DC Memory LED control signal 7 LED_ATTENTION _N I 0 3 3 V DC Attention LED control signal 8 LED_PROCESSI NG_N I 0 3 3 V DC Processing LED control signal 9 SHUT_DOWN I 0 3 3 V DC 24 V down signal 10 LIGHTOFF_POW ERON I 0 3 ...

Page 603: ...0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 18 SGND Ground 19 G3 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 20 G4 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 21 G5 MSB O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 22 SGND Ground 23 B0 LSB O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 24 B1 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 25 B2 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 26 SGND Ground 27 B3 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 28 B4 O 0 3 3 V DC LCD Control signal 29 B5 MSB O 0...

Page 604: ...N I 0 3 3 V DC Power key On Off 4 SCAN1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Scan signal 1 5 LED1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel LED display drive signal 1 6 SUPND_POWER O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to OPWB2 7 KEY3 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel key scan return sig nal 3 8 KEY2 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel key scan return sig nal 2 9 KEY1 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel key scan return sig nal 1 10 LE...

Page 605: ...se Operation panel LED display drive signal 2 10 LED3 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel LED display drive signal 3 11 LED4 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Operation panel LED display drive signal 4 12 GND Ground YC8 1 PROCESSING_L ED O 0 3 3 V DC Processing LED control signal Connected to operation PWB 3 2 MEMORY LED O 0 3 3 V DC Memory LED control signal 3 ATTENTION_LED O 0 3 3 V DC Attention LED control sig...

Page 606: ...ont PWB Figure 2 3 7 Front PWB silk screen diagram YC16 YC18 YC14 YC13 YC12 YC1 YC2 YC3 YC11 YC10 YC9 YC17 YC4 YC5 YC19 YC8 YC6 YC7 YC15 1 1 1 10 8 20 11 1 1 10 10 1 1 40 1 50 1 1 10 11 10 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 11 10 1 20 40 21 3 1 20 9 1 10 ...

Page 607: ...Bk _1 I 0 3 3 V DC DEVPWB K control signal 6 TPD_TEMP_Bk O Analog Developer thermistor K detection sig nal 7 GND Ground 8 DRM_INDEX_M O 0 3 3 V DC DRM M control signal 9 ERS_ M_REM I 0 24 V DC CL M On Off 10 TPD_M_1 O Analog DEVPWB M detection signal 11 DLP_VCONT_M_ 1 I 0 3 3 V DC DEVPWB M control signal 12 TPD_TEMP_M O Analog Developer thermistor M detection sig nal 13 GND Ground 14 DRM_INDEX_C O...

Page 608: ...se EEPROM data signal 36 GND Ground 37 LSU_FAN_REM I 0 24 V DC LSUFM On Off 38 CLEAN_MOT_LO CK O 0 3 3 V DC WTM lock signal 39 CLEAN_MOT_RE M I 0 24 V DC WTM On Off 40 GND Ground YC3 1 GND Ground Connected to engine PWB 2 WTNR_SET Not used 3 INTER_LOCK Not used 4 IH_CORE_SENS Not used 5 IH_CORE_MOT_ REM Not used 6 IH_CORE_CLK Not used 7 WTNR_LED I 0 3 3 V DC pulse WTS1 LED emitter signal 8 IH_COIL...

Page 609: ... On Off 26 DLP_FAN_CLR_ H I 0 24 V DC DEVFM1 On Off 27 DLP_FAN_CLR_L I 0 24 V DC DEVFM1 On Off 28 WTNR_FULL O Analog WTS2 detection signal 29 WTNR_NEAR O Analog WTS2 detection signal 30 WTNR_VCONT I 0 3 3 V DC WTS2 control signal 31 GND Ground 32 ROT_MOT_REM Not used 33 ROT_MOT_CLK Not used 34 ROT_MOT_PD Not used 35 ROT_MOT_DIR Not used 36 ROT_HP_SENS Not used 37 THOP_MOT_Bk_ REM Not used 38 THOP_...

Page 610: ...CORE B Not used 3 ROT_CORE A Not used 4 ROT_CORE B Not used 5 GND Not used 6 ROT_HP_SENS Not used 7 5V Not used 8 SB_CORE B O 0 24 V DC pulse EM drive control signal 9 SB_CORE A O 0 24 V DC pulse EM drive control signal 10 SB_CORE B O 0 24 V DC pulse EM drive control signal 11 SB_CORE A O 0 24 V DC pulse EM drive control signal 12 GND Ground 13 EXIT_FEED_SEN S I 0 3 3 V DC SBS On Off 14 5V O 5 V D...

Page 611: ...1 detection signal 3 WTNR_LED O 0 3 3 V DC pulse WTS1 LED emitter signal 4 5V_LED O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to WTS1 5 GND Ground 6 WTNR_SET I Analog WTS2 detection signal 7 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to WTS2 8 WTNR_NEAR Not used 9 WTNR_LED Not used 10 5V_LED Not used YC9 1 TPD_TEMP_BK I Analog Developer thermistor K detection sig nal Connected to developer unit K 2 DLP_VCONT_BK _1 O 0 3 3 V DC DEVPWB K ...

Page 612: ... DEVPWB M detection signal 4 TN_CLK_M O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 5 GND Ground 6 DLP_ADR1_M Not used 7 DLP_ADR0_M Not used 8 EEP_SDA1 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 9 EEP_SCL1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM clock signal 10 3 3V2 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to DEVPWB M 11 3V O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to VM M 12 VIB_MOT O 0 24 V DC VM M On Off YC12 1 3 3V2 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to DRPWB C ...

Page 613: ...m unit Y 2 EEP_SCL1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM clock signal 3 EEP_SDA1 I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 4 GND Ground 5 DRM_ADR0_ Y Not used 6 DRM _ADR1_ Y Not used 7 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to CL Y 8 ERS_ Y _REM O 0 24 V DC CL Y On Off YC15 1 TPD_TEMP_Y I Analog Developer thermistor Y detection sig nal Connected to developer unit Y 2 DLP_VCONT_Y_ 1 O 0 3 3 V DC DEVPWB Y control signal 3 ...

Page 614: ...ock signal 5 FRONT_OPEN O 0 3 3 V DC FRCSW On Off 6 GND Ground 7 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LSUFM 8 LSU_FAN_OUT O DC0V 243V LSUFM On Off 9 CL_MOT O DC0V 243V WTM On Off 10 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to WTM 11 GND Ground YC19 1 3 3V1 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to OTEM2 Connected to outer temper ature sensor 2 2 I2C_SDA I 0 3 3 V DC pulse EEPROM data signal 3 GND Ground 4 I2C_SCL O 0 3 3 V DC pu...

Page 615: ...e 2 3 8 Feed PWB 1 silk screen diagram YC20 YC3 YC27 YC19 YC18 YC17 YC14 YC10 YC16 YC13 YC12 YC4 YC4 YC4 YC26 YC23 YC22 YC25 YC9 YC15 YC8 YC11 YC5 11 1 1 7 1 20 1 1 1 10 1 6 1 1 1 50 1 64 8 1 2 15 18 2 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 7 3 8 4 1 2 12 9 4 ...

Page 616: ...ff RET 11 GND Ground 12 BELT_JAM_SENS Not used 13 DU_SENS O 0 3 3 V DC DUS2 On Off 14 PRESS_RLS_SE NS O 0 3 3 V DC TRRS On Off 15 PRESS_MOT_RE M2 I 0 24 V DC TRRM On Off 16 PRESS_MOT_RE M1 I 0 24 V DC TRRM On Off 17 DU_FAN Not used 18 DU_OPEN O 0 3 3 V DC DUCSW On Off 19 GND Ground 20 DU2_REM CL_L OW I 0 3 3 V DC DUM2 DUCL2 On Off 21 DU2_CLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse DUM2 clock signal 22 DU2_PD I 0 3 3 V...

Page 617: ...MOT_RDY O 0 3 3 V DC FUM ready signal 46 FSR_MOT_CLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse FUM clock signal 47 FSR_MOT_REM I 0 3 3 V DC FUM On Off 48 FSR_CL_REM Not used 49 GND Ground 50 EXIT_REAR_FAN _H I 0 24 V DC ERFM On Off 51 EXIT_REAR_FAN _L I 0 24 V DC ERFM On Off 52 PRESS_REM Not used 53 FSR_RELAY I 0 3 3 V DC Fuser relay signal 54 ZEROC Not used 55 SUB_HEAT_REM Not used 56 MAIN_HEAT_RE M Not used 57 GND Gro...

Page 618: ... 10 REG_MOT_CLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse RM clock signal 11 REG_MOT_PD I 0 3 3 V DC RM control signal 12 GND Ground 13 DLP_MOT_CLR_ DIR Not used 14 DLP_MOT_CLR_ RDY Not used 15 DLP_MOT_CLR_ CLK Not used 16 DLP_MOT_CLR_ REM Not used 17 GND Ground 18 DRM_MOT_CLR_ DIR Not used 19 DRM_MOT_CLR_ RDY Not used 20 DRM_MOT_BK_C LR_CLK Not used 21 DRM_MOT_CLR_ REM Not used 22 GND Ground 23 DLP_MOT_BK_DI R Not used...

Page 619: ...al 36 TRANS_MOT_CL K I 0 3 3 V DC pulse TRCM clock signal 37 TRANS_MOT_RE M I 0 3 3 V DC TRCM On Off 38 GND Ground 39 TCON_SET Not used 40 DU_ENTER_SEN S O 0 3 3 V DC DUS1 On Off 41 EXIT_FAN I 0 24 V DC EFM On Off 42 GND Ground 43 DU1_MOT_REM CL_H I 0 3 3 V DC DUM1 DUCL1 On Off 44 DU1_MOT_CLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse DUM1 clock signal 45 DU1_MOT_PD I 0 3 3 V DC DUM1 control signal 46 EDGE_FAN_H I 0 24 V...

Page 620: ...powersource PWB 2 DRM_HEAT_REM O 0 3 3 V DC FH On Off 3 POWER_OFF O 0 3 3 V DC Sleep mode signal On Off YC10 1 GND Ground Connected to ID sensor1 2 and cleaning solenoid 2 M_TEMP Not used 3 3 3V O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to IDS1 4 REG_F_LED O Analog IDS1 control signal 5 GND Ground 6 REG_SENS_F_P I Analog IDS1 detection signal 7 REG_SENS_F_S I Analog IDS1 detection signal 8 3 3V O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V D...

Page 621: ...T_DI R O 0 3 3 V DC TRM drive switch signal 3 TRANS_MOT_RD Y I 0 3 3 V DC TRM ready signal 4 TRANS_MOT_CL K O 0 3 3 V DC pulse TRM clock signal 5 TRANS_MOT_RE M O 0 24 V DC TRM On Off 6 GND Ground 7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to TRM 8 GND Not used 9 24V2 Not used 10 TANK_SET Not used YC14 1 REG_BK_LED Not used Connected to relay PWB 2 REG_BK_SENS1 _P Not used 3 REG_BK_SENS1 _S Not used 4 BELT_JA...

Page 622: ... 24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from PCUSW YC16 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to HVPWB2 Connected to high voltage PWB 2 2 GND Ground YC17 1 TC_TONER_LED Not used Connected to relay PWB 2 TC_TONER_FUL L Not used 3 TC_TONER_MOT _B Not used 4 TC_TONER_MOT _A Not used 5 MPF_LIFT_MOT_ B O 0 24 V DC MPLM On Off 6 MPF_LIFT_MOT_ A O 0 24 V DC MPLM On Off 7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V dc power to RYPWB 8 MPF_CL_REM...

Page 623: ...C 24 V DC power to FUM YC19 1 EXIT_REAR_FAN O 0 24 V DC ERFM On Off Connected to eject rear fan motor 2 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ERFM YC20 1 JOB_SET I 0 3 3 V DC Job separator set signal Connected to job separator 2 GND Ground 3 GND Ground 4 JOB_MOT_REM O 0 24 V DC JSEM On Off 5 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to JSMPWB 6 JOB_MOT_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse JSEM clock signal 7 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC po...

Page 624: ... O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to RYPWB YC25 1 REG_MOT_B O 0 24 V DC pulse RM drive control signal Connected to registration motor 2 REG_MOT_A O 0 24 V DC pulse RM drive control signal 3 REG_MOT_B O 0 24 V DC pulse RM drive control signal 4 REG_MOT_A O 0 24 V DC pulse RM drive control signal YC26 1 3 3V2 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to EPWB Connected to engine PWB 2 3 3V3 O 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power to EPW...

Page 625: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 3 75 2 3 8 Feed PWB 2 Figure 2 3 9 Feed PWB 2 silk screen diagram YC6 YC8 YC7 YC4 YC3 YC13 YC12 YC10 YC1 YC11 YC2 YC5 3 5 1 1 15 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 14 28 15 4 1 1 1 1 7 6 50 2 12 24 13 1 ...

Page 626: ...2_LNG2 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW2 On Off 15 CAS2_LNG1 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW2 On Off 16 CAS1_WID O 0 3 3 V DC PWSW1 On Off 17 CAS1_LNG3 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW1 On Off 18 CAS1_LNG2 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW1 On Off 19 CAS1_LNG1 O 0 3 3 V DC PLSW1 On Off 20 GND Ground 21 CAS2_QUANT2 O 0 3 3 V DC PGS2 L On Off 22 CAS2_QUANT1 O 0 3 3 V DC PGS2 U On Off 23 CAS1_QUANT2 O 0 3 3 V DC PGS1 L On Off 24 CAS1_QUANT1 O 0 3 3 V DC PGS1 ...

Page 627: ...0 ASIST_CL1 I 0 24 V DC ASCL1 On Off YC2 1 FEED_MOT_GAI N Not used Connected to paper feed motor 2 FEED_MOT_DIR O 0 3 3 V DC PFM drive switch signal 3 FEED_MOT_RDY I 0 3 3 V DC PFM ready signal 4 FEED_MOT_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse PFM clock signal 5 FEED_MOT_REM O 0 24 V DC PFM On Off 6 GND Ground 7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PFM YC3 1 CAS1_LNG1 I 0 3 3 V DC PLSW1 On Off Connected to paper lengt...

Page 628: ... 24 GND Ground 25 CAS2_QUANT1 I 0 3 3 V DC PGS2 U On Off 26 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PGS2 L 27 GND Ground 28 CAS2_QUANT2 I 0 3 3 V DC PGS2 L On Off YC4 1 FEED_CL1_REM O 0 24 V DC PFCL1 On Off Connected to paper feed clutch 1 2 2 24V2 O 24 V DC PFCL124 V DC power to PFCL1 3 FEED_CL2_REM O 0 24 V DC PFCL2 On Off 4 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PFCL2 YC5 1 NC Not used Connected to paper con ...

Page 629: ...5 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MCL YC8 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PUSOL1 Connected to primary paper feed unit 2 PICK_SOL1_REM O 0 24 V DC PUSOL1 On Off ACT 3 PICK_SOL1_RET O 0 24 V DC PUSOL1 On Off RET 4 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PS1 5 GND Ground 6 CAS1_EMPTY_S ENS I 0 3 3 V DC PS1 On Off 7 LED_5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to LS1 8 GND Ground 9 CAS1_LIFT_UP_ SENS I 0 3 3 V DC LS1 On Of...

Page 630: ...24 V DC 24 V DC power to ASCL1 YC11 1 GND Ground Connected to feed PWB 1 2 GND Ground 3 GND Ground 4 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to FPWB1 5 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1 6 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FPWB1 YC12 1 ASIST_CL2 O 0 24 V DC ASCL2 On Off Connected to assist clutch 2 2 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to ASCL2 YC13 1 CURRENT_SIG I 0 3 3 V DC Current signal Connected to current PWB 2 ...

Page 631: ... 2LC 2 3 81 2 3 9 Relay PWB Figure 2 3 10 Relay PWB silk screen diagram YC6 YC16 YC11 YC5 YC2 YC15 YC12 YC3 YC4 YC1 YC7 YC8 YC14 YC9 YC13 YC10 1 10 1 1 1 16 1 1 8 1 4 1 6 1 3 1 12 1 11 1 18 2 1 1 20 2 9 7 1 9 1 8 ...

Page 632: ... V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1 10 PRESS_RLS_RE M2 I 0 24 V DC TRRM On Off 11 PRESS_RLS_RE M1 I 0 24 V DC TRRM On Off 12 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power from FPWB1 13 PRESS_RLS_SE NS O 0 3 3 V DC TRRS On Off 14 DU_SENS O 0 3 3 V DC DUS2 On Off 15 BELT_JAM_SENS Not used 16 REG_BK_SENS1 _S Not used 17 REG_BK_SENS1 _P Not used 18 REG_BK_LED Not used YC2 1 GND Ground Connected to MP tray unit 2 MPF_LNG I 0 3 ...

Page 633: ... O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to MPPFCL 15 MPF_LIFT_DR_A O 0 24 V DC MPLM On Off 16 MPF_LIFT_DR_B O 0 24 V DC MPLM On Off YC7 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DUCL2 Connected to duplex clutch 2 duplex cover switch and duplex motor 2 2 DU_CL2_REM O 0 24 V DC DUCL2 On Off 3 DU_OPEN I 0 3 3 V DC DUCSW On Off 4 GND Ground 5 DU2_B O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM2 drive control signal 6 DU2_A O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM2 d...

Page 634: ...O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EFM1 6 EXIT_FAN_REM O 0 24 V DC EFM2 On Off 7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to EFM2 8 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DUCL1 9 DU_CL_UPPER_ REM O 0 24 V DC DUCL1 On Off YC12 1 GND Ground Connected to feed PWB 1 2 GND Ground 3 MPF_TABLE O 0 3 3 V DC MPTSW On Off 4 MPF_WID1 O 0 3 3 V DC MPPWSW On Off 5 MPF_WID2 O 0 3 3 V DC MPPWSW On Off 6 MPF_WID3 O 0 3 3 V DC MPPWSW On Off...

Page 635: ...1_A I 0 24 V DC pulse DUM1 drive control signal 5 DU1_B I 0 24 V DC pulse DUM1 drive control signal 6 DU1_A I 0 24 V DC pulse DUM1 drive control signal 7 DU1_B I 0 24 V DC pulse DUM1 drive control signal 8 GND Ground 9 DU_CL_UPPER_ REM I 0 24 V DC DUCL1 On Off 10 24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power from FPWB1 11 EXIT_FAN I 0 24 V DC EFM On Off 12 DU_ENTER_SEN S O 0 3 3 V DC DUS1 On Off YC14 1 GND Ground ...

Page 636: ...4 V DC pulse DUM1 drive control signal 3 DU1_B O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM1 drive control signal 4 DU1_A O 0 24 V DC pulse DUM1 drive control signal 5 EDGE_FAN_REM O 0 24 V DC FUFM1 On Off 6 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FUFM1 7 EDGE_FAN_REM O 0 24 V DC FUFM2 On Off 8 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FUFM2 Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 637: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 3 87 2 3 10 Motor control PWB Figure 2 3 11 Motor control PWB silk screen diagram YC5 YC3 YC7 YC6 YC4 YC2 YC1 1 1 14 1 1 14 10 1 1 1 6 24 11 12 22 24 ...

Page 638: ...EED I 0 3 3 V DC TBLS On Off 6 EMERGENCY I 0 3 3 V DC MCPWB control signal 7 ENG_RDY O 0 3 3 V DC MCPWB ready signal 8 ENG_SDO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse MCPWB serial communication data signal 9 ENG_SEL I 0 3 3 V DC MCPWB select signal 10 ENG_SDI I 0 3 3 V DC pulse MCPWB serial communication data signal 11 ENG_CLK I 0 3 3 V DC pulse MCPWB clock signal 12 BLT_FG Not used 13 MOT_ON I 0 3 3 V DC MCPWB contro...

Page 639: ...O 0 3 3 V DC DRM Y control signal 17 DRM_C_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse DRM C clock signal 18 DRM_Y_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse DRM Y clock signal 19 DRM_C_S S O 0 3 3 V DC DRM C control signal 20 DRM_Y_S S O 0 3 3 V DC DRM Y control signal 21 PGND Ground 22 PGND Ground 23 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DRM C 24 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DRM Y YC5 1 NC Not used Connected to drum motor K M 2 NC Not use...

Page 640: ... V DC 24 V DC power to DRM K 24 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DRM M YC7 1 DLP_M_GAIN Not used Connected to developer motor MCY K 2 DLP_M_CW CCW O 0 24 V DC DEVM MCY On Off 3 DLP_M_LD O 0 3 3 V DC DEVM MCY control signal 4 DLP_M_CLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse DEVM MCY clock signal 5 DLP_M_S S O 0 3 3 V DC DEVM MCY control signal 6 PGND Ground 7 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to DEVM MCY 8 DLP_BK_GAIN Not u...

Page 641: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 3 91 2 3 11 LSU relay PWB Figure 2 3 12 LSU relay PWB silk screen diagram YC3 YC4 YC5 YC6 YC7 YC9 YC8 YC10 YC2 YC1 10 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 5 10 1 10 5 10 60 1 1 8 ...

Page 642: ...10 LDD_CS 1 Y I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB Y control signal 11 EEPROM CS Y I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB Y EEPROM data signal 12 LDD_CS 1 C I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB C control signal 13 EEPROM CS C I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB C EEPROM data signal 14 LDD_CS 1 M I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB M control signal 15 EEPROM CS M I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB M EEPROM data signal 16 LDD_CS 2 Bk I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB K control signal 17 ...

Page 643: ...D Ground 39 INT_ST 1 M I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB M control signal 40 PALA_SIG P0 M I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB M control signal 41 PALA_SIG P1 M I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB M control signal 42 PALA_SIG P2 M I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB M control signal 43 GAIN FIX M I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB M control signal 44 SGND Ground 45 DATA_2N_M LVD S I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal M N 46 DATA_2P_M LVD S I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data sig...

Page 644: ...Y O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB Y alarm signal 5 PALA_SIG P3 Y I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB Y control signal 6 PALA_SIG P4 Y I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB Y control signal 7 SGND Ground 8 SDCLK Y I 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB Y clock signal 9 SGND Ground 10 DATA_1N_Y LVD S I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal Y N 11 DATA_1P_Y LVD S I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal Y P 12 SGND Ground 13 REM Y I 0 24 V DC PM Y On Off 14 LOCK Y ...

Page 645: ...lse APCPWB M clock signal 39 SGND Ground 40 DATA_1N_M LVD S I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal M N 41 DATA_1P_M LVD S I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal M P 42 SGND Ground 43 REM M I 0 24 V DC PM M On Off 44 LOCK M O 0 3 3 V DC PM M lock signal 45 CLK M I 0 3 3 V DC pulse PM M clock signal 46 SGND Ground 47 BD Bk O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Horizontal synchronization signal K 48 LSU_TH Bk O Analog LSU ...

Page 646: ...DI1 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 11 SDO1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 12 CLK1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB K clock signal 13 EEPROM CS 1 Bk I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB K EEPROM data signal 14 MSET_N O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB K control signal 15 CUALM Bk I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB K alarm signal 16 INT_ST 2 Bk O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB K control signal 17 INT_ST 1 Bk O 0 3 3...

Page 647: ...DC APCPWB M control signal 10 SDI1 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 11 SDO1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 12 CLK1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB M clock signal 13 EEPROM CS M I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB M EEPROM data signal 14 MSET_N O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB M control signal 15 CUALM M I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB M alarm signal 16 O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB M control signal 17 INT_...

Page 648: ... 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB C 9 LDD_CS 1 C O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB C control signal 10 SDI1 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 11 SDO1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 12 CLK1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB C clock signal 13 EEPROM CS C I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB C EEPROM data signal 14 MSET_N O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB C control signal 15 CUALM C I 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB C...

Page 649: ...wer to APCPWB Y 7 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB Y 8 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to APCPWB Y 9 LDD_CS 1 Y O 0 3 3 V DC APCPWB Y control signal 10 SDI1 I 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 11 SDO1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 12 CLK1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB Y clock signal 13 EEPROM CS Y I O 0 3 3 V DC pulse APCPWB Y EEPROM data signal 14 MSET_N O 0 3 3 V DC ...

Page 650: ...TA_1N_Y LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal Y N 26 DATA_1P_Y LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal Y P 27 SGND Ground 28 DATA_2N_Y LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal Y N 29 DATA_2P_Y LVD S O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Video data signal Y P 30 SGND Ground Connector Pin Signal I O Voltage Description ...

Page 651: ...0 072LK0UN Drum unit K DK 8505 K Developing unit K DV 8305K Transfer belt unit TR 8505 Transfer roller PARTS ROLLER SECONDLY TRANSFER SP MK 8305B Maintenance kit 600 000 pages MK 8305B MAINTENANCE KIT 1702LK0UN1 072LK0U1 Drum unit C DK 8505 C Drum unit M DK 8505 M Drum unit Y DK 8505 Y Developing unit C DV 8305C Developing unit M DV 8305M Developing unit Y DV 8305Y MK 8305C Maintenance kit 300 000...

Page 652: ...8505 K Developing unit K DV 8505K Transfer belt unit TR 8505 Transfer roller PARTS ROLLER SECONDLY TRANSFER SP MK 8505B Maintenance kit 600 000 pages MK 8505B MAINTENANCE KIT 1702LC0UN1 072LC0U1 Drum unit C DK 8505 C Drum unit M DK 8505 M Drum unit Y DK 8505 Y Developing unit C DV 8505C Developing unit M DV 8505M Developing unit Y DV 8505Y MK 8505C Maintenance kit 300 000 pages MK 8505C MAINTENANC...

Page 653: ... 127 5 mm 5 109 9 mm 4 5 16 57 mm 2 1 4 63 mm 2 1 2 Carger roller Magnet roller 94 2 mm 3 11 16 Press roller 30 ppm 35 ppm Press roller 45 ppm 55 ppm Heat roller 936 mm 36 7 8 Transfer belt Sleeve roller Right registration roller Left registration roller 75 mm 2 15 16 Transfer roller 94 mm 3 11 16 Drum ...

Page 654: ... Changing emulation mode to PCL6 R FRPO P1 6 EXIT FRPO parameters Item FRPO Setting values Factory setting Top margin A1 Integer value in inches 0 A2 Fraction value in 1 100 inches 0 Left margin A3 Integer value in inches 0 A4 Fraction value in 1 100 inches 0 Page length A5 Integer value in inches 17 A6 Fraction value in 1 100 inches 30 Page width A7 Integer value in inches 17 A8 Fraction value in...

Page 655: ...return linefeed 1 Linefeed action P3 0 Ignores 1 Linefeed 2 Linefeed carriage return 1 Automatic emulation switching P4 0 AES disabled 1 AES enabled 120V 1 220 240V 0 Alternative emulation For KPDL3 P5 Same as the P1 values except that 9 is ignored 6 Automatic emulation switching trigger P7 0 Page eject commands 1 None 2 Page eject and prescribe EXIT commands 3 Prescribe EXIT commands 4 Formfeed L...

Page 656: ... 18 2 cm 16 Commercial 9 3 7 8 8 7 8 inches 17 Commercial 6 3 5 8 6 1 2 inches 18 ISO B5 17 6 25 cm 19 Custom 11 7 17 7 inches 30 C4 22 9 32 4 cm 31 Hagaki 10 14 8 cm 32 Ofuku hagaki 14 8 20 cm 33 Officio II 39 8K 40 16K 42 8 5 13 5 inches 50 Statement 51 Folio 52 Youkei 2 53 Youkei 4 0 Default cassette R4 0 MP tray 1 Cassette 1 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3 4 Cassette 4 5 Cassette 5 6 Cassette 6 7 Ca...

Page 657: ...et coding 53 Font pitch for fixedpitch scalable font U8 Default font pitch integer value 10 U9 Default font pitch decimal value 0 Font height for the default scal able font V0 Integer value in 100 points 0 to 9 0 V1 Integer value in points 0 to 99 12 V2 decimal value in 1 100 points 0 25 50 75 0 Default scalable font V3 Name of typeface of up to 32 characters enclosed with single or double quotati...

Page 658: ...6 Thick 17 High quality 21 to 28 Custom1 to 8 1 Paper type for optional cassettes 3 to 7 X3 X4 X5 X6 X10 1 Plain 3 Preprinted 5 Bond 6 Recycled 9 Letterhead 10 Color 11 Prepunched 17 High quality 21 to 28 Custom1 to 8 1 PCL paper source X9 0 Performs paper selection depending on media type 1 Performs paper selection depending on paper sources 0 Automatic continue for Press GO Y0 0 Off 1 On 0 Autom...

Page 659: ... size Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size 3 Through the image Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size 8 Through the image Loads paper from the current paper cassette 9 Through the image Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size 10 Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size Loads Letter A4 size paper depending on the image size 0 e ...

Page 660: ...2LK 2LN 2LM 2LC 2 4 10 This page is intentionally left blank ...

Page 661: ...ting the leading edge registra tion of the cassette printing adjustment Registration motor turning on timing secondary paper feed start timing U034 LSU Out Top U034 test pattern P 1 3 34 6 Adjusting the leading edge margin printing adjustment LSU illumination start timing U402 Lead U402 test pattern P 1 3 150 7 Adjusting the trailing edge margin printing adjustment LSU illumination end timing U402...

Page 662: ...elect Rotate U072 For copying originals from the DP To make an adjustment for duplex copying select Back 12 Adjusting the leading edge registra tion scanning adjustment Original scan start timing U066 U071 Front Rotate Front Head Back Head Test chart P 1 3 54 P 1 3 59 U066 For copying an original placed on the platen To make an adjustment for trailing edge registra tion select Rotate U071 For copy...

Page 663: ...5 A11 A8 2 A3 24V1 1 DF_RDY DF_DET 5V EXIT_SENS 18 17 18 17 GND 6 3 4 5 5 1 DF_SDO 2 2 DF_CLK 1 DF_SEL 3 1 DF_SDI 7 4 7 A12 PF_RDY PF_SEL 2 1 1 2 Relay Relay 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 GND N C 16 19 EXIT_SOL_REM 24V1 DECAL_PH GND EXIT_COV_OPEN EXIT_SOL_RET GND 5V BRIDGE1 CLK GND BRIDGE1 PD BRIDGE_SENS 1 BRIDGE_OPEN 15 10 13 9 14 12 13 12 11 3 14 3 6 15 1 18 17 17 16 8 BRIDGE2 DIR 5 13 12 BRIDGE_SENS 2 BRIDGE...

Page 664: ... DATA_4P_BK LVDS SGND CUALM_BK PARA_SIG_P3_BK PARA_SIG_P4_BK SGND LOCK_BK CLK_BK SDCLK_BK SGND DATA_1N_BK LVDS DATA_1P_BK LVDS SGND REM_BK SGND DATA_1N_M LVDS BD_BK LSU_TH_BK DATA_1P_M LVDS SGND REM_M LOCK_M CLK_M SGND SGND LOCK_C SGND SDCLK_M PARA_SIG_P3_M SGND BD_M BD_C SGND LSU_TH_M CUALM_M DATA_1P_C LVDS SDCLK_C SGND DATA_1N_C LVDS SGND REM_Y CLK_Y SGND LOCK_Y PARA_SIG_P3_Y PARA_SIG_P4_Y DATA_...

Page 665: ... SDCLK_Y PARA_SIG_P0_BK PARA_SIG_P1_BK PARA_SIG_P2_BK BD_Y GAIN_FIX_BK DATA_2P_C LVDS GAIN_FIX_C SGND DATA_2N_C LVDS SGND LSU_TH_C CUALM_C PARA_SIG_P3_C PARA_SIG_P4_C REM_C CLK_C PARA_SIG_P4_M GAIN_FIX_Y SGND PALA_STG_P0_C DATA_2N_Y LVDS INT_ST 1 C SGND PALA_STG_P1_Y SDO MSET_N SGND IDD_CS_Y SDI SGND SGND EEPROM_CS_M IDD_CS_2_BK PALA_STG_P0_Y PALA_STG P2_Y EEPROM_CS_2_BK INT_ST 1 Y SGND DATA_2N_BK...

Page 666: ...DLP_VCONT_Bk_1 GND TPD_Bk_1 ERS_Bk DRM_INDEX_Bk DRM_INDEX_M DLP_VCONT_Y_1 ERS_Y DRM_INDEX_Y TPD_TEMP_Y TPD_Y_1 GND 40 37 7 24V 4 I2C_SCL 10 CL_MOT 9 24V WTNR_SET 5V WTNR_FULL WTNR_LED 5V_LED 1 TPD_TEMP_Y 5V WTNR_NEAR WTNR_LED 2 DLP_VCONT_Y_1 3 TPD_Y_1 4 TN_CLK_Y 5 GND 6 DLP_ADR1_Y 7 DLP_ADR0_Y 8 EEP_SDA1 9 EEP_SCL1 1 3 3V2 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 3V2 5 DRM_ADR0_Y 2 EEP_SCL1 3 EEP_SDA1 4 GND 5V T...

Page 667: ...9 A8 A9 5V A8 FSR_FAN_ALM A10 A11 A14 A13 FSR_RLS_SENS 24V1 5V GND FSR_SIZE_SENS FSR_BLT_PLS GND A20 GND BRIDGE_FAN 24V1 EDGE_FAN 24V1 B20 EDGE_FAN_ALM A5 A1 EDGE_FAN_ALM A18 A17 A16 PRESS_TH GUIDE_TH1 GND FSR_RLS_DR_CW GND GND GND GND MAIN_TH1 MAIN_TH2 5V FSR_RLS_DR_CCW MAIN_TH1 MAIN_TH2 EDGE_FAN EDGE_FAN_ALM GND MAIN_TH1 MAIN_TH2 GND GUIDE_TH2 24V EDGE_FAN EDGE_FAN_ALM 24V GND GUIDE_TH2 GND EDGE...

Page 668: ...T1 39 32 33 35 37 36 30 29 34 36 37 40 44 CLN_SOL_RET GND PRESS_MOT_REM1 PRESS_MOT_REM2 BELT_JAM_SENS 46 DU_OPEN DU_FAN 48 EDGE_FAN_H 10 41 45 7 8 9 46 9 9 38 43 43 40 40 39 39 38 35 32 37 36 35 33 36 37 23 20 18 19 19 22 21 23 22 13 14 17 16 15 16 DRM_MOT_BK_REM GND TRANS_MOT_DIR 17 20 TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_RDY DU1_MOT_CLK DU1_MOT_PD DU_ENTER_SENS EXIT_FAN DU1_MOT_REM CL_H 13 14 15 3 11 8 7 4 6...

Page 669: ...2 MPF_LIFT1 39 32 33 35 37 36 30 29 34 36 37 40 44 CLN_SOL_RET GND PRESS_MOT_REM1 PRESS_MOT_REM2 BELT_JAM_SENS 46 DU_OPEN DU_FAN 48 EDGE_FAN_H 10 41 45 7 8 9 46 9 9 38 43 43 40 40 39 39 38 35 32 37 36 35 33 36 37 23 20 18 19 19 22 21 23 22 13 14 17 16 15 16 DRM_MOT_BK_REM GND TRANS_MOT_DIR 17 20 TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_RDY DU1_MOT_CLK DU1_MOT_PD DU_ENTER_SENS EXIT_FAN DU1_MOT_REM CL_H 13 14 15 3 1...

Page 670: ...4 6 7 8 3 4 5 12 GND 9 16 9 14 15 14 10 MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS 9 8 8 16 17 5V 16 17 4 6 1 7 10 GND 5V BELT_JAM_SENS 8 1 GND 3 1 3 2 Vout 1 5V 1 2 2 3 4 8 2 Vout 2 1 24V2 1 24V2 1 3 3V GND Vout Vout GND 2 1 1 2 8 7 7 2 6 11 1 8 9 9 7 7 5 3 11 13 12 5 11 6 12 13 1 2 2 3 3 2 10 11 13 11 9 12 10 9 6 5 13 12 3 18 19 14 15 2 B23 1 D44 B28 B25 B27 B26 8 18 5 B22 B30 D43 4 3 B29 2 7 6 9 12 PRESS_RLSMOT2 REG_B...

Page 671: ...24 C31 1 1 9 4 6 7 8 3 4 5 12 GND 9 16 9 14 15 14 10 MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS 9 8 8 16 17 5V 16 17 4 6 1 7 10 GND 5V BELT_JAM_SENS 8 1 GND 3 1 3 2 Vout 1 5V 1 2 2 3 4 8 2 Vout 2 1 24V2 1 24V2 1 3 3V GND Vout Vout GND 2 1 1 2 8 7 7 2 6 11 1 8 9 9 7 7 5 3 11 13 12 5 11 6 12 13 1 2 2 3 3 2 10 11 13 11 9 12 10 9 6 5 13 12 3 18 19 14 15 2 B23 1 D44 B28 B25 B27 B26 8 18 5 B22 B30 D43 4 3 B29 2 7 6 9 12 PRESS_...

Page 672: ...17 2 1 3 2 GND 2 3 3 5V 1 1 18 Vout 5V GND Vout 1 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 GND 2 3 3 5V 1 Vout 5V GND Vout 1 3 1 3 1 5V 1 Vout 3 2 2 15 1 LIFT_MOT2_DR 7 7 6 2 3 1 3 5V 24V2 2 V FEED_CL_REM 24V2 3 2 6 5 4 MID_CL_REM 8 4 FEED_CL2_REM 8 7 4 5 GND 1 GND 7 9 11 10 GND 8 2 GND 5V Vout 2 1 6 3 3 2 2 3 4 5V 1 2 3 BEND_SENS GND 6 MID_B MID_B MID_A MID_A 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 5 24V2 7 2 4 3 2 24V2 3 2 1 1 2 2 9 3 Vout GND 3 G...

Page 673: ...7 2 1 3 2 GND 2 3 3 5V 1 1 18 Vout 5V GND Vout 1 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 GND 2 3 3 5V 1 Vout 5V GND Vout 1 3 1 3 1 5V 1 Vout 3 2 2 15 1 LIFT_MOT2_DR 7 7 6 2 3 1 3 5V 24V2 2 V FEED_CL_REM 24V2 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 MID_CL_REM 8 2 FEED_CL2_REM 8 7 4 3 GND 1 GND 7 9 11 10 GND 8 2 GND 5V Vout 10 2 1 8 3 3 2 2 3 4 5V 1 2 3 BEND_SENS GND 6 MID_B MID_B MID_A MID_A 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 5 24V2 7 2 4 3 2 24V2 3 2 1 1 2 2 9 3 1 CO...

Page 674: ... DRM_INDEX_M 10 10 BLT_SPEED BLT_INDEX 5 8 7 7 9 2 19 21 20 22 4 MOT_CLK BLT_REM DRM_ON MOT_DATA_SET BLT_FG GND GND DRM_INDEX_BK DRM_INDEX_Y DRM_INDEX_C BLT_VM BLT_BRAKE 5V 5V MOT_SDO EMERGENCY MOT_SDI MOT_RDY MOT_SEL DRM_INDEX_M BLT_SPEED BLT_INDEX MOT_CLK 3 1 1 5 3 4 1 2 8 9 7 6 14 13 12 10 11 DLP_Y_GAIN 1 DLP_Y_CW CCW 2 DLP_Y_LD 3 DLP_Y_CLK 4 DLP_Y_S S 5 PGND 6 24V1 7 DLP_C_GAIN 8 DLP_C_CW CCW ...

Page 675: ...3 9 24V1 24 22 11 11 3 8 7 2 8 MOT_SDO 2 EMERGENCY 6 6 MOT_SDI 4 MOT_RDY 5 MOT_SEL DRM_INDEX_M 10 10 BLT_SPEED BLT_INDEX 5 8 7 7 9 2 19 21 20 22 4 MOT_CLK BLT_REM DRM_ON MOT_DATA_SET BLT_FG GND GND DRM_INDEX_BK DRM_INDEX_Y DRM_INDEX_C BLT_VM BLT_BRAKE 5V 5V MOT_SDO EMERGENCY MOT_SDI MOT_RDY MOT_SEL DRM_INDEX_M BLT_SPEED BLT_INDEX MOT_CLK 3 1 1 5 3 4 1 2 8 9 7 6 14 13 12 10 11 DLP_Y_GAIN 1 DLP_Y_CW...

Page 676: ..._CNT_C DC_SLV_CNT_C MAIN_IDC_Y DC_MAIN_CNT_Y MAIN_IDC_C DC_MAG_REM SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_C DC_MAIN_REM AC_MAIN_CLK DC_MAG_CNT_C SGND AC_SLV_CLK_Y DC_SLV_CNT_Y AC_MAIN_CNT_Y DC_MAG_CNT_Y AC_MAG_CNT_Y DISCHARGE_Y DC_REC_CNT SGND FB_CNT T2_REM SP_REM T1_CNT1 T1_CNT2 SGND SP_CNT T2_CNT AC_MAG_CLK_M AC_MAG_CLK_Bk AC_MAG_CNT_Bk MAIN_IDC_M SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_M SGND DC_SLV_CNT_M AC_SLV_CLK_M AC_MAIN_CNT_M DC_MAI...

Page 677: ...C_SLV_CNT_C AC_MAG_CNT_C AC_MAIN_CNT_C DC_SLV_CNT_C MAIN_IDC_Y DC_MAIN_CNT_Y MAIN_IDC_C DC_MAG_REM SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_C DC_MAIN_REM AC_MAIN_CLK DC_MAG_CNT_C SGND AC_SLV_CLK_Y DC_SLV_CNT_Y AC_MAIN_CNT_Y DC_MAG_CNT_Y AC_MAG_CNT_Y DISCHARGE_Y DC_REC_CNT SGND FB_CNT T2_REM SP_REM T1_CNT1 T1_CNT2 SGND SP_CNT T2_CNT AC_MAG_CLK_M AC_MAG_CLK_Bk AC_MAG_CNT_Bk MAIN_IDC_M SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_M SGND DC_SLV_CNT_M A...

Page 678: ...6 5 4 1 7 8 6 4 5 3 2 1 7 8 6 4 5 3 2 1 7 8 6 4 5 3 2 1 30 DGB7 29 TG GND 3 2 CCDCLK2 5 4 SH 12 12 11 11 29 30 30 31 DGB6 DGB5 SH 10 10 DGB2 34 TG 33 GND 25 DGB4 RS 23 24 34 GND Mono Color 9 7 GND GND CCDCLK1 5 1V 6 39 40 6 4 40 5 1 4 2 1 3 3 2 2 4 10V 1 DBB7 37 DBB5 35 36 HHALF TWS_DET 40 SLEEP 39 38 GND 41 42 LA2 42 41 LA3 43 44 LA4 44 43 45 LA5 45 46 LA6 46 LA7 47 47 LA8 48 LA9 49 49 48 LD4 LD3...

Page 679: ... 5 4 SH 12 12 11 11 29 30 30 31 DGB6 DGB5 SH 10 10 DGB2 34 TG 33 GND 25 DGB4 RS 23 24 34 GND Mono Color 9 7 GND GND CCDCLK1 5 1V 6 39 40 6 4 40 5 1 4 2 1 3 3 2 2 4 10V 1 DBB7 37 DBB5 35 36 HHALF TWS_DET 40 SLEEP 39 38 GND 41 42 LA2 42 41 LA3 43 44 LA4 44 43 45 LA5 45 46 LA6 46 LA7 47 47 LA8 48 LA9 49 49 48 LD4 LD3 LD5 50 GND 58 LD1 LD2 63 LA12 63 64 4 LA11 SMOT AP 6 5 4 11 11 3 3V GND 10 9 POW 9 1...

Page 680: ...3 1 2 3 4 11 6 5 7 9 8 10 12 13 6 1 7 6 9 1 10 5 3 2 3 4 5 6 ID 7 8 AUDIO 6 5 6 2 2 LIGHTOFF_POWERON SHUT_DOWN SGND PANEL_STATUS INT_POWERKEY_N PANEL RESET DEEP_POWERON LED_MEMORY_N SUPND_POWER ENERGY_SAVE LED_ATTENTION_N LED_PROCESSING_N AUDIO LIGHTOFF_POWERON SHUT_DOWN SGND PANEL_STATUS INT_POWERKEY_N PANEL RESET MEMORY LED ATTENTION_LED GND 1 D6 D7 CE1 GND D3 D4 CMD 2 23 24 25 26 27 2 D1 VSS 3 ...

Page 681: ...N TAP TBN TBP SGND TCP SGND TCLKN SGND VSYNC_DP VSYNC_DN VSYNC_CN VSYNC_BP VSYNC_BN VSYNC_AN HSYNC_DP HSYNC_DN HSYNC_BP HSYNC_CN HSYNC_AP HSYNC_AN SGND EG_SI EG IRN SLEEP SGND TCN TCLKP VSYNC_CP VSYNC_AP HSYNC_CP HSYNC_BN NC 39 39 NC 37 37 NC 35 35 NC NC 33 33 NC 32 NC 31 31 NC 29 29 CH1_N 28 CH1_P 27 27 CH2_N 25 25 CH2_P 24 SGND 23 23 CH3_P 21 21 SGND 20 VCLK_N 19 19 SGND 17 17 VSYNC_DP 16 VSYNC_...

Page 682: ...1 1 INSTALLATION GUIDE INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR DOCUMENT PROCESSOR ...

Page 683: ...l cara arriba 1 M PWB del relé del DP 1 1 1 DP 771 solamente Gelieferte Teile A DP 1 B Originalmatte 1 C Befestigungshalterung Breite 38 5 mm 2 DP 770 1 DP 771 Deutsch C Befestigungshalterung Breite 45 mm 1 1 D Winkeleinstellbefestigung 1 E DP Kabelabdeckung 1 F Stift 1 G M4 14TP Schraube 8 H Linke Scharnierabdeckung 1 1 I Rechte Scharnierabdeckung 1 1 J M3 8 Schraube SCHWARZ 1 1 K Schild Funktion...

Page 684: ...cher DIMM 1GB 1 Die DIMM Speichermodule müssen separat aufgerüstet werden bevor man die Dual Scan Funk tion des DP 771 benutzt Bestellen Sie ein DIMM Speichermodul zusammen mit den Serviceteilen Ersatzteil Nr 302LH94230 PARTS MEMORY MODULE SP Einzelheiten hierzu finden Sie in den Anleitungen auf Seite 12 N Memoria DIMM 1GB 1 La memoria DIMM deve essere espansa separatamente prima di usare la Funzi...

Page 685: ...maßnahmen Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Die Abbildungen des DP in der Installationsanleitung gelten für Modell DP 771 Verfahren Schalten Sie vor Installation des DP unbedingt den MFP Hauptschalter aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung DP 770 1 Die Zapfen 1 jeder Befestigungshalterung ...

Page 686: ...Befestigungshalter ung C und an der breiteren Befestigungshalter ung C mit den entsprechenden Öffnungen 2 am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterun gen in den MFP einsetzen 2 Die Befestigungshalterungen C C mit den 2 M4 14TP Schrauben G befestigen Installieren des DP 3 Scharnierloch 3 des DP A mit Stift 4 der Befestigungshalterung C ausrichten und DP A auf den MFP stellen 4 Den DP A nach vorn...

Page 687: ...els des DP um 60 Grad 6 Winkeleinstellbefestigung D an der Rück seite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 14TP Schrauben G befestigen Einstellen des Öffnungs Schließungswin kels des DP um 30 Grad 7 Die obere Abdeckung 6 des DP A öffnen 8 Die 3 TP Schrauben 7 und die Schraube 8 entfernen und dann den Riemen 9 von der hinteren Abdeckung 10 abnehmen Dann die hintere Abdeckung 10 des DP A abnehmen 9 An...

Page 688: ...arniers einsetzen 11 Anschlagring 11 an der Wellenkerbe 12 anbringen und Welle befestigen 12 12 Die in Schritt 8 ausgebaute hintere Abdeck ung 10 mittels der 3 TP Schrauben 7 und der Schraube 8 wieder anbringen Anschließen der DP Signalleitungen nur DP 770 Beim DP 771 weitergehen zu Schritt 13 auf Seite 8 13 Die Schraube 13 entfernen und die Abdeckung 14 des DP Kabelanschlusses abnehmen 14 Die Kap...

Page 689: ...so 13 Vaya al paso 25 de la página 13 15 Die DP Signalleitung 16 durch die rechte Öffnung in der DP Kabelabdeckung E füh ren und dann die DP Signalleitung 16 durch die Abdeckung 14 des DP Kabelan schlusses führen 16 Den Stecker 17 der DP Signalleitung an den Stecker 18 der ISC Leiterplatte anschließen 17 Die DP Kabelabdeckung E an der Abdeck ung 14 des DP Kabelanschlusses anbrin gen und die Abdeck...

Page 690: ...e la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP 21 Anschließen der DP Signalleitungen nur DP 771 13 Die 8 Schrauben 19 entfernen und die obere hintere Abdeckung 20 des MFP abnehmen 14 Die Kappe 22 des DP Kabelanschlusses von der Abdeckung 21 des DP Kabelan schlusses abnehmen Collegare la linea del segnale DP solo DP 771 13 Rimuovere le 8 viti 19 e quindi rimuovere il coperchio superiore posteriore 20 d...

Page 691: ...en la ilustración 16 Instale la cubierta del cable del DP E y la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP 21 15 Die DP Signalleitung 23 durch die rechte Öffnung in der DP Kabelabdeckung E führen Dann die rote CIS Signalleitung 24 durch die linke Öffnung führen HINWEIS Wenn Sie die DP Signalleitung 23 und die CIS Datenleitung 24 durch dieselbe Öffnung füh ren könnte es zu Bildfehlern kommen Achten Sie...

Page 692: ...onector 27 del MFP 17 Den Stecker 23 der DP Signalleitung an den Stecker 25 der ISC Leiterplatte anschließen 18 Entfernen Sie die 2 Befestigungsschrauben 30 und dann die Platte 31 Installieren der DP Relaisleiterplatte 19 Den Stecker 26 an der DP Relaisleiterplatte M mit dem Stecker 27 am MFP verbinden 17 Inserire il connettore 23 della linea del seg nale DP nel connettore 25 sull ISC PWB 18 Rimuo...

Page 693: ...é del DP M 20 Befestigen Sie die DP Relaisleiterplatte M mit Hilfe der Platte 31 und der 2 Schrauben 30 21 Die DP Relaisleiterplatte M mit zwei M3 x 8 Schrauben N befestigen 22 Die CIS Datenleitung 24 an den Stecker 28 auf der DP Relaisleiterplatte M anschließen 20 Fissare la scheda a circuiti stampati di comuni cazione DP M usando la piastra 31 e 2 viti 30 21 Fissare la scheda a circuiti stampati...

Page 694: ... superiore posteriore 20 dell MFP utilizzando le 8 viti 19 メモリーDIMM 1GB の増設手順 モノクロ機の 35 枚機 45 枚機 55 枚機のみ 23 主回路基板のメモリースロット YS2 にメモリーDIMM N を挿入する カチッと音がするまで挿入すること 24 ビス 19 8 本で MFP 本体の後上カバー 20 を元通り取り付ける Opérations pour l expansion de la mémoire DIMM 1GB machines monochromes 35 45 et 55 ppm uniquement 23 Insérer la mémoire DIMM N dans la fente mémoire YS2 de la carte de CI principale Insérer à fond ...

Page 695: ... instrucciones para el original 26 Cierre el DP A y fije la alfombrilla para originales B con el velcro Befestigen der Originalmatte 25 Die Originalmatte B mit dem Klettband 29 nach oben über das Kontaktglas legen Die Ecke der Originalmatte B die einen 90 Grad Winkel aufweist mit der linken inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten 26 Den DP A schließen und die Originalmatte B mit dem Klet...

Page 696: ...rta de la bisagra derecha I usando el tornillo M3 8 NEGRO J Installieren der Scharnierabdeckung nur DP 771 Beim DP 770 gehen Sie zum Schritt 29 auf Seite 15 weiter 27 Die linke Scharnierabdeckung H anbrin gen 28 Die rechte Scharnierabdeckung I mit der M3 8 Schraube SCHWARZ J anbringen Installazione del coperchio cerniera solo DP 771 Per DP 770 procedere con il punto 29 a pagina 15 27 Installare il...

Page 697: ... destino del MFP sobre la eti queta en la cubierta de originales Figura b Anbringen des Schildes 29 Das Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld mit Alkohol reinigen 30 Das Schild Funktionsanweisung K in der Sprache des jeweiligen Einsatzlandes des MFP auf das vorhandene Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld aufkleben Abbildung a 31 Das Warnschild Originalschriftseite nach oben L in der Sprache des jeweilige...

Page 698: ...l a en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia Funktionsprüfung 1 Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original a vorbereiten auf das 4 Linien b 20 mm von den Kanten des A3 Blattes und 1 Linie c in der Mitte gezeichnet sind 2 Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten 3 Das Original a auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie er...

Page 699: ... 4 Das Original a mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem Abstandstyp durchführen Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung HINWEIS Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt ist die U068 DP Scan Position zu verstellen Wenn Sie die Scan Position mit U...

Page 700: ...ntral al mismo tiempo Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste vea la página 26 Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 20 Bezugswert Simplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 4 0 mm Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinte...

Page 701: ... la línea central vea la página 33 Valor de referencia Copia simple dentro de 2 0 mm Copia duplex dentro de 3 0 mm Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 29 Bezugswert Innerhalb 1 5 Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten Timings auf Seite 31 Bezugswert Innerhalb 2 5 mm Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 33 Bezugswert Simplexkopie innerhalb 2 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Per c...

Page 702: ...ara el copiado dúplex la separación horizontal de la línea 2 debe estar dentro de 4 0 mm Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante 1 Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Einzelkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie ...

Page 703: ...cala aprox 1 0 mm 4 Haga una copia de prueba 2 DP 770 Die Winkeleinstellbefestigung D entfernen Die 2 M4 14TP Schrauben G an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterung C lösen DP 771 Die linke Scharnierabdeckung H und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung D entfernen Die 2 M4 14TP Schrauben G an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalter ungen C C lösen 3 Die Einstellschraube 3 an der Rückseite des recht...

Page 704: ...ginal B y vuelva a colocar vea los pasos 25 y 26 en la página 13 5 Die obigen Schritte wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist Bezugswert Einzelkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 3 0 mm liegen Duplexkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 4 0 mm liegen 6 Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 14TP S...

Page 705: ...nte ajuste Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante 1 Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters prüfen Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die fol gende Einstellung durchzuführen Bezugswert Für Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Für Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm Controll...

Page 706: ... und den Riemen 6 von der hinteren Abdeckung 7 abnehmen Dann die hintere Abdeckung 7 des DP A abnehmen 4 Die Höhe des DP einstellen Lösen Sie die Mutter 8 Für Kopienmuster f Lösen Sie die Ein stellschraube 9 Für Kopienmuster g Die Einstellschraube 9 festziehen Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich ca 0 5 mm 10 Ziehen Sie die Mutter 8 wieder fest 5 Die in Schritt 3 entfernte hintere Abdeckung 7 wieder a...

Page 707: ...ferencia Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm 7 Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen 8 Die Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist Bezugswert Für Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Für Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm 7 Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia 8 Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la l...

Page 708: ...ithilfe des Originals Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist 1 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten DP Auto Adj wählen und die Start Taste betätigen um ein Original auszudrucken 2 Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start Taste betäti gen 3 Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start Taste betäti gen um die Oberflächeneins...

Page 709: ...brauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 1 F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set zen 2 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten DP Faceup Chart2 Input und die Start Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen um die Oberfläche neinstellung ausführen zu lassen 3 Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird ist ...

Page 710: ... servicio 4 Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automa tischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das Original einstellen indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den DP eingeführt wird 5 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten DP FaceDown Chart2 Nor mal Target Input und die Start Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführ...

Page 711: ...b Scan CIS ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor ación secundaria CIS del escáner DP 771 Überprüfen der Vergrößerung 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 3 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Subscanrichtung Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 1 5 Ha...

Page 712: ...exploración principal separación horizontal de la línea 3 dentro de 1 5 3 Die Werte einstellen Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels h j Den Wert erhöhen Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels i k Den Wert verringern Änderung pro Schritt 0 10 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 3 des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist Bezugswert Sub...

Page 713: ...nferior para exploración CIS Überprüfen des Vorderkanten Timings 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 2 5 mm 2 Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden Front Head Zur Einstell...

Page 714: ...valor de referencia Valor de referencia Separación vertical de la línea 2 dentro de 2 5 mm 3 Die Werte einstellen Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt Kopierbeispiel l Den Wert ver ringern Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt Kopierbeispiel m Den Wert erhöhen Änderung pro Schritt 0 17 mm 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels d...

Page 715: ...ral CIS Überprüfen der Mittellinie 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie 1 des Originals a und der Mit tellinie 2 des Kopierbeispiels prüfen Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen Bezugswert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 für die Einzelkopie 2 0 mm Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 für die Duplexkopie 3 0 mm 2 Zum Ein...

Page 716: ...izontal de la línea de centro 2 para el copiado dúplex 3 0 mm 3 Die Werte einstellen Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist Kopierbeispiel n Den Wert erhöhen Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist Kopierbeispiel o Den Wert verringern Änderung pro Schritt 0 085 mm 4 Eine Testkopie erstellen 5 Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist ...

Page 717: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR PAPER FEEDER ...

Page 718: ...s las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Papiereinzug 1 B Stift 2 C Halterung 1 D Eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit 1 Deutsch E Klemme 1 F Kabelabdeckung 1 G Papierformatplatte 2 H S Tite Schraube M4 8 3 I Papiertypplatte 6 J Anschlag 2 K S Tite Schrauben M4 20 4 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teile...

Page 719: ...des MFP aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab bevor Sie mit der Installation des Papiereinzugs beginnen 1 Die einzelnen Kassetten herausziehen dann den Hebeplattenanschlag 1 von jeder Kassette entfernen und an der Speicherposi tion 2 anbringen 2 Alle Kassetten sachte schließen 3 Nehmen Sie die untere Papierlade 3 vom MFP ab 4 Die Stift 4 entfernen und die untere Papie...

Page 720: ...so 4 5 Den MFP 7 so auf den Papiereinzug A setzen dass die Stifte 5 vorne links und vorne rechts am Papiereinzug A auf die Öffnungen 6 im Boden des MFP ausgeri chtet sind 6 Den MFP 7 mit den 2 Stiften B am Papiereinzug A sichern 7 Die Schiene 8 der unteren Papierlade im MFP herausziehen 8 Den Haken 9 auf der Schiene 8 in die Öff nung 10 der unteren Papierlade 3 einpassen und die untere Papierlade ...

Page 721: ...tor nillo H 10 Die Schraube 11 an der Rückseite des Papiereinzugs entfernen und die Abdeckung 12 abnehmen 11 Die Schraube 13 herausdrehen um die Metallplatte 14 abzunehmen 12 Den Haken 15 auf der Montageplatte C in die Öffnung 16 einpassen und dann die 2 Positionierungsnasen ausrichten 13 Die Montageplatte C mit der Schraube H befestigen 10 Rimuovere la vite 11 nel retro dell unità di alimentazion...

Page 722: ... durch den Kantenschutz klein 18 und das Signalkabel 19 durch den Kantenschutz groß 20 führen und dann den Kantenschutz schließen 15 Das Netzkabel 21 und das Signalkabel 22 an den entsprechenden Steckverbind ern 23 24 des MFP anschließen 16 Die Abdeckung 12 mittels der in Schritt 10 entfernten Schraube 11 wieder anbringen 17 Die untere rechte Abdeckung 25 am MFP öffnen Den Riemen 26 von der Welle ...

Page 723: ...20 Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia D con los 2 tornillos H 18 Die rechte Abdeckung 28 des Papiere inzugs öffnen 19 Die 3 Haken 29 an der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit D in die 3 Öffnungen 30 in der Füh rung einpassen 20 Die eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit D mit den 2 Schrauben H sichern 18 Aprire il pannello destro 28 dell unità di ali mentazione della carta 19 Inserire i 3 ...

Page 724: ...or de papel 21 Den Steckverbinder 31 der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit anschließen 22 Die Klemme E anbringen und das Kabel des Steckverbinders sichern 23 Die Nase 32 der Kabelabdeckung F in die Öffnung 33 des Papiereinzugs einsetzen und die Kabelabdeckung F anbringen 24 Die rechte Abdeckung 28 des Papiere inzugs schließen und die untere rechte Abdeckung 25 wieder am MFP einsetzen 25 Die Einstel...

Page 725: ...nillos S Tite M4 20 K de manera que los topes se conecten a tierra en el suelo 26 Wählen Sie die Öffnungen 38 und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag J mit den 2 S Tite Schrauben M4 20 K so an dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen 26 Selezionare i fori 38 ed installare ogni fermo J con le 2 viti S Tite M4 20 K in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra sul pavimento 26 転倒防止金具 J が床面に接地するように 穴 38 を選択してビス M4 ...

Page 726: ...erencia diferencia izquierda derecha de 1 5 mm o menor Einsetzen der Papierformatplatte und der Medientypplatte Die Platten halb zusammenklappen und in die Öffnungen für Format bzw Medientyp ein schieben Näheres hierzu siehe Bedienungs anleitung Einstellung bei verkantetem Papiereinzug 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am Hauptschalter ein 2 Legen ...

Page 727: ...verificar la imagen 4 Ziehen Sie die Papierlade 35 aus dem Papiereinzug und lösen Sie die 4 Schrauben 36 5 Drehen Sie die Einstellschraube 37 um die Cursor Verkantung zu korrigieren 6 Ziehen Sie die 4 Schrauben 36 wieder an 7 Erstellen Sie zur Überprüfung des Bilds noch einmal eine Testkopie 4 Estrarre il cassetto 35 dell unità di alimentazione della carta e quindi allentare le 4 viti 36 5 Ruotare...

Page 728: ...de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellen des Vorderkanten Timing Der Bezugswert des Vorderkanten Timing ist 20 1 5 mm an Position b des korrekten Bilds a Falls das Timing außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist fol gende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Top und Cassette L 2 Die Werte einstellen Testmuster c Den Einstellwert erhöhen...

Page 729: ... configuración Einstellen der Mittenlinie Der Bezugswert für die Mittenlinie ist 0 5 mm oder weniger an Position f des korrekten Bilds e Falls die Mittenlinie außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette3 oder Cassette4 2 Die Werte einstellen Testmuster g Den Einstellwert erhöhen Testmuster h Den ...

Page 730: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR LARGE CAPACITY FEEDER ...

Page 731: ...s las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Papiereinzug 1 B Stift 2 C Halterung 1 D Eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit 1 Deutsch E Klemme 1 F Kabelabdeckung 1 G Papierformatplatte 2 H S Tite Schraube M4 8 3 I Papiertypplatte 6 J Anschlag 2 K S Tite Schrauben M4 20 4 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teile...

Page 732: ...Sie den Netzstecker des MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab bevor Sie mit der Installation des Papiereinzugs beginnen 1 Die rechte Papierlade 1 und die linke Papierlade 2 herausziehen jeden der Hebeplattenanschläge 3 entfernen und in der vorgesehenen Position verstauen 2 Alle Kassetten sachte schließen 3 Nehmen Sie die untere Papierlade 4 vom MFP ab 4 Die Stift 5 entfernen und die untere Papier lade 4 im...

Page 733: ...so 4 5 Den MFP 8 so auf den Papiereinzug A setzen dass die Stifte 6 vorne links und vorne rechts am Papiereinzug A auf die Öffnungen 7 im Boden des MFP ausgeri chtet sind 6 Den MFP 8 mit den 2 Stiften B am Papiereinzug A sichern 7 Die Schiene 9 der unteren Papierlade im MFP herausziehen 8 Den Haken 10 auf der Schiene 9 in die Öff nung 11 der unteren Papierlade 4 einpassen und die untere Papierlade...

Page 734: ...tor nillo H 10 Die Schraube 12 an der Rückseite des Papiereinzugs entfernen und die Abdeckung 13 abnehmen 11 Die Schraube 14 herausdrehen um die Metallplatte 15 abzunehmen 12 Den Haken 16 auf der Montageplatte C in die Öffnung 17 einpassen und dann die 2 Positionierungsnasen ausrichten 13 Die Montageplatte C mit der Schraube H befestigen 10 Rimuovere la vite 12 nel retro dell unità di alimentazion...

Page 735: ... durch den Kantenschutz klein 19 und das Signalkabel 20 durch den Kantenschutz groß 21 führen und dann den Kantenschutz schließen 15 Das Netzkabel 22 und das Signalkabel 23 an den entsprechenden Steckverbind ern 24 25 des MFP anschließen 16 Die Abdeckung 13 mittels der in Schritt 10 entfernten Schraube 12 wieder anbringen 17 Die untere rechte Abdeckung 26 am MFP öffnen Den Riemen 27 von der Welle ...

Page 736: ...20 Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia D con los 2 tornillos H 18 Die rechte Abdeckung 29 des Papiere inzugs öffnen 19 Die 3 Haken 30 an der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit D in die 3 Öffnungen 31 in der Füh rung einpassen 20 Die eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit D mit den 2 Schrauben H sichern 18 Aprire il pannello destro 29 dell unità di ali mentazione della carta 19 Inserire i 3 ...

Page 737: ...dor de papel 21 Den Steckverbinder 32 der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit anschließen 22 Die Klemme E anbringen und das Kabel des Steckverbinders sichern 23 Die Nase 33 der Kabelabdeckung F in die Öffnung 34 des Papiereinzugs einsetzen und die Kabelabdeckung F anbringen 24 Die rechte Abdeckung 29 des Papiere inzugs schließen und die untere rechte Abdeckung 26 wieder am MFP einsetzen 25 Die Einste...

Page 738: ...mo J con le 2 viti S Tite M4 20 K in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra sul pavimento 26 転倒防止金具 J が床面に接地するように 穴 49 を選択してビス M4 20 S タイト K 各 2 本で取り付ける 26 Sélectionner les trous 49 et installer chaque butée J avec 2 vis S Tite M4 20 K de sorte que les butées reposent sur le sol 26 在孔 49 处各用 2 颗 M4 20 紧固型 S 螺丝 K 安装限位器 J 使之和地板接触 26 전도방지쇠 J 가 바닥면에 접지될 수 있도록 구멍 49 을 선택해 나사 M4 20 S 타이트 K 각 2 개로 설치합니다 26...

Page 739: ...sor frontal de la plataforma 37 Einsetzen der Papierformatplatte und der Medientypplatte Die Platten halb zusammenklappen und in die Öffnungen für Format bzw Medientyp ein schieben Näheres hierzu siehe Bedienungs anleitung Ändern des Papierformats nur metrische Spe zifikationen Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zollmaß das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen mit metrischem Maß das F...

Page 740: ... 6 Libere el gancho 41 y quite el cursor del borde inferior de la plataforma 42 3 Den vorderen Konsole Cursor 37 so verschieben dass er mit den Formatanzeigen oben 39 und unten 38 an der Kassette fluchtet 4 Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel 36 zum Verriegeln um 90 drehen 5 Den hinteren Konsole Cursor 40 auf gleiche Weise verschieben 6 Den Haken 41 lösen und den Hinterkante Cursor 42 der Konsole abne...

Page 741: ...e provocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel 7 Den Unter Cursor 43 anheben 8 Auf die Formatanzeige 44 ausrichten den Haken 45 einsetzen und den Hinterkante Cursor 42 der Konsole anbringen Einstellen der Cursor Breite 1 Papier in die Papierladen einlegen 2 Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 37 und dem Papier 46 außerhalb des Bereichs 0 5 bis 1 5 mm liegt wenn das Pa...

Page 742: ... de entre 0 5 y 1 5 mm 3 Einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher in die 2 langen Öffnungen 47 im vorderen Konsole Cursor 37 stecken und die 2 Einstellschrauben 48 lösen Danach den vorderen Konsole Cursor 37 verschieben 4 Die 2 Einstellschrauben 48 wieder anzie hen 5 Vergewissern Sie sich dass der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 37 und dem Papier im Bereich 0 5 bis 1 5 mm liegt 3 Inserire un...

Page 743: ...de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellen des Vorderkanten Timing Der Bezugswert des Vorderkanten Timing ist 20 1 5 mm an Position b des korrekten Bilds a Falls das Timing außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist fol gende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Top und Cassette L 2 Die Werte einstellen Testmuster c Den Einstellwert erhöhen...

Page 744: ... configuración Einstellen der Mittenlinie Der Bezugswert für die Mittenlinie ist 0 5 mm oder weniger an Position f des korrekten Bilds e Falls die Mittenlinie außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034 wählen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette3 oder Cassette4 2 Die Werte einstellen Testmuster g Den Einstellwert erhöhen Testmuster h Den ...

Page 745: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR SIDE DECK ...

Page 746: ...ticas de 65 y 80 ppm Español Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 30 30 35 35 45 45 und 55 50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 35 45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65 65 und 75 70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 65 und 80 ppm Mono chrommaschinen Deutsch I riferimenti per l...

Page 747: ...l amortiguador de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Seitlicher Einzug 1 B Großer Basis Schieber 1 C Kleiner Basis Schieber 1 D Arretierstift 2 E Schalterdruckplatte 1 F M4 8 Schraube 8 G Papierformatplatte 1 H Papiertypplatte 1 I Abdeckplatte 1 J M4 10 Schneidschraube 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Parti di fornitura A Uni...

Page 748: ...lten Sie unbedingt den Hauptschalter des MFP aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab bevor Sie mit der Installation des seitlichen Einzugs beginnen Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 12 1 Die untere rechte Abdeckung 1 am MFP öffnen Den Riemen 2 von der Welle 3 abnehmen und d...

Page 749: ... Sie die Papierförderabdeckung 4 des MFP 3 Öffnen Sie die Platte 6 der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 5 des MFP 4 Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben 7 und nehmen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 5 ab 5 Entfernen Sie eine Schraube 9 von der mit tleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 8 2 Aprire il coperchio 4 dell unità di trasporto carta dell MFP 3 Aprire il pannello 6 sul coperchio destro anteriore 5 dell MFP 4 Rim...

Page 750: ...ben 10 heben Sie die mittlere rechte hintere Abdeckung 8 von unten her an und nehmen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 11 ab 7 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben dreher die Platte 13 von der unteren rech ten Abdeckung 12 des Papiereinzugs ab 8 Die rechte Abdeckung 14 des Papiere inzugs öffnen Nehmen Sie den Riemen 15 von der Welle 16 der rechten Abdeckung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 14...

Page 751: ... und eine Schraube 18 und nehmen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 19 des Papiereinzugs ab Für PF 740 9 Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben 17 und eine Schraube 20 und nehmen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 19 des Papiereinzugs ab 10 Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung 21 von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 5 ab und die Ablösungsabdeckung 22 von der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 11 Per PF 730 9 Rimuovere le...

Page 752: ...atte 23 von der unteren rech ten Abdeckung 1 des MFP ab Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 23 Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 12 Die rechte Abdeckung 1 25 am MFP öff nen Den Riemen 26 von der Welle 27 abnehmen und dann die rechte Abdeckung 1 25 abnehmen 13 Die rechte Abdeckung 2 28 am MFP öff nen Nehmen Sie den Riemen 29 von der Welle 30 der rechten Abdeckung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 2 2...

Page 753: ...en Sie die Papierförderabdeckung 31 des MFP 15 Öffnen Sie die Platte 33 der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 32 des MFP 16 Entfernen Sie 4 Schrauben 34 und nehmen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 32 ab 17 Entfernen Sie eine Schraube 36 von der mittleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 35 14 Aprire il coperchio 31 dell unità di trasporto carta dell MFP 15 Aprire il pannello 33 sul coperchio destro anteriore 3...

Page 754: ...erta derecha inferior 41 18 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben dreher die Platte 38 von der unteren rech ten hinteren Abdeckung 37 ab 19 Entfernen Sie 5 Schrauben 39 heben Sie die mittlere rechte hintere Abdeckung 35 von unten her an und nehmen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 37 ab 20 Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben 40 und nehmen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 41 ab 18 Rimuovere il pannello...

Page 755: ...usando un tornillo M4 8 F 21 Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung 42 von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 32 ab und die Ablösungsabdeckung 43 von der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 37 22 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben dreher die Platte 44 von der rechten Abdeckung 1 25 des MFP ab 23 Bringen Sie mit einer M4 8 Schraube F den Arretierungsstift D vorne rechts am MFP an 21 Rimuovere il coperchi...

Page 756: ...grande B 24 Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise mit einer M4 8 Schraube F den Arretierungsstift D hinten rechts am MFP an 25 Setzen Sie den kleinen Basis Schieber C auf den großen Basis Schieber B Setzen Sie ihn so auf dass die Biegung 46 am kleinen Basis Schieber C innerhalb der Auflage 45 am Ende des großen Basis Schiebers B anliegt 24 Installare un perno di bloccaggio D sulla parte posteriore destra ...

Page 757: ...icios para tornillo R 26 Stecken Sie den kleinen Basis Schieber C unter den Papiereinzug Befestigen Sie ihn mit 2 M4 8 Schrauben F so an der Basis 47 dass der Abstand zwischen dem kleinen Basis Schieber C und dem großen Basis Schieber B 6 2 mm beträgt Bei Modell PF 730 an den mit R markierten Schraublöchern befestigen 26 Inserire lo scivolo di base piccolo C sotto l unità di alimentazione carta In...

Page 758: ...ter zu Schritt 33 27 Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 19 des Papiereinzugs wie der an 28 Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 14 des Papiereinzugs wieder an 29 Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 11 wieder an 30 Befestigen Sie eine Schraube 9 an der mittleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 8 31 Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 5 wieder an 32 Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdecku...

Page 759: ...g 41 wieder an 34 Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 37 wieder an 35 Befestigen Sie eine Schraube 36 an der mittleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 35 36 Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 32 wieder an 37 Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 2 28 wieder an 38 Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 1 25 wieder an 39 Befestigen Sie mit der M4 10 Sch neidschraube J die Schalterdruckplatte E Ins...

Page 760: ...tallare il coperchio I utilizzando 2 viti M4 8 F 40 ビス M4 8 F 2 本でベーススライダー大 B にサイドフィーダー A を取り付ける その際 ベーススライダー大 B の取付板の平行線 48 にビス M4 8 F のセンターがくるように取り 付ける 41 ビス M4 8 F 2 本でカバープレート I を 取り付ける 40 Fixer le dispositif du plateau d alimentation latéral A à la grande règle de base B à l aide de 2 vis M4 8 F Procéder de sorte que l axe des vis M4 8 F recouvre la ligne horizontale 48 du plateau de montage s...

Page 761: ...Signalkabel 49 für den seitlichen Einzug A am Papiereinzug Steckverbinder 50 an 43 Drücken Sie auf den seitlichen Einzug A um ihn mit dem MFP zu verbinden Ändern des Papierformats nur metrische Spe zifikationen Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zollmaß das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen mit metrischem Maß das Format A4 Das Format kann wie folgend auf B5 umge schaltet werden 1 Z...

Page 762: ... 3 6 Mueva el cursor trasero de la plataforma 6 de la misma forma 3 Entfernen Sie eine Schraube 3 und nehmen Sie den vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 heraus 4 Versetzen Sie den vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 um die Formatmarkierung 5 am Boden der Papierlade anzupassen die äußerste ist A4 die innerste ist B5 5 Befestigen Sie den vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 mit der Schraube 3 6 Versetzen Sie den hinteren Konsole ...

Page 763: ...U208 y ajuste el tamaño de papel 7 Entfernen Sie eine Schraube 7 und nehmen Sie den Hinterkante Cursor 8 her aus 8 Versetzen Sie den Hinterkante Cursor 8 um die Formatmarkierung 9 am Boden der Papierlade anzupassen 9 Befestigen Sie den Hinterkante Cursor 8 mit der Schraube 7 10 Bringen Sie den Anschlag 2 wieder mit der Schraube 1 an 11 Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus und stellen Sie das Papi...

Page 764: ...o grande puede provocar prob lemas con la alimentación torcida de papel Einstellen der Cursor Breite 1 Papier in die Papierladen einlegen 2 Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 und dem Papier 10 außerhalb des Bereichs 0 5 bis 1 0 mm liegt wenn das Papier 10 am hinteren Konsole Cursor 6 anliegt ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen Eine zu kleine Cursor Breite kann den Papiereinz...

Page 765: ...l papel sea de entre 0 5 y 1 0 mm 3 Lösen Sie 2 Einstellschrauben 11 am vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 und versetzen Sie den Cur sor 4 unter Beobachtung der Skale 12 4 Die 2 Einstellschrauben 11 wieder anziehen 5 Vergewissern Sie sich dass der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 4 und dem Papier im Bereich 0 5 bis 1 0 mm liegt 3 Allentare le 2 viti di regolazione 11 sul cursore frontale del de...

Page 766: ...iguración Einstellen der Mittenlinie Überprüfen Sie die Abweichung zwischen der Mitte 1 eines korrekten Bilds a und der Mitte 2 eines Prüfmusters Bezugswert Innerhalb 2 0 mm 1 Stellen Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 ein Wählen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette5 2 Die Werte einstellen Testmuster b Den Einstellwert erhöhen Testmuster c Den Einstellwert verringern 3 Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start Ta...

Page 767: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR SIDE MULTI TRAY ...

Page 768: ... y 75 70 ppm y a las máquinas mono cromáticas de 65 y 80 ppm Español Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 45 45 und 55 50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65 65 und 75 70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 65 und 80 ppm Mono chrommaschinen Deutsch I riferimenti per le MFP a velocità media...

Page 769: ... amortiguador de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Seitliches Mehrzweck Papierfach 1 B Großer Basis Schieber 1 C Kleiner Basis Schieber 1 D Arretierstift 2 E Schalterdruckplatte 1 F M4 8 Schraube 10 G Papierformatplatte 1 H Papiertypplatte 4 I Abdeckplatte 1 J M4 10 Schneidschraube 1 K Anschlag 2 L Aufkleber Kassettennummer 6 1 M Aufkleber Kassettennummer 7 1 N Schelle 2 O Film 1 Entfer...

Page 770: ...uando instale la PF 780 R Y Z y una W PF 730 740 Gelieferte Teile P Papiereinzug 1 Q Stift 2 R Halterung 1 S Eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit 1 T Klemme 1 U Kabelabdeckung 1 V Papierformatplatte 2 W S Tite Schraube M4 8 3 X Papiertypplatte 6 Y Anschlag 2 Z S Tite Schraube M4 20 4 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Die folgenden Teile bei de...

Page 771: ... cubierta divi soria 2 Verfahren Schalten Sie unbedingt den Hauptschalter des MFP aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab bevor Sie mit der Installation des seitlichen Einzugs beginnen Seitlicher Einzug 1 Die Abdeckung 1 des Papiereinzugs P abnehmen Die Abdeckung 1 nicht verwenden 2 Die Rippen mit einer Zange schneiden und dann die Ablösungsabdeckung 2 ent fernen Proced...

Page 772: ...y quite la cubierta derecha 5 3 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben dreher die Platte 3 von der unteren rechten Abdeckung 4 des Papiereinzugs ab 4 Die rechte Abdeckung 5 des Papiereinzugs öffnen Nehmen Sie den Riemen 6 von der Welle 7 der rechten Abdeckung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 5 ab 3 Rimuovere il pannello 3 dal coperchio destro inferiore 4 sull unità di alimentazione carta utilizzando ...

Page 773: ...Reinstallare il coperchio destro 5 dell unità di alimentazione carta PF 730 の場合 5 ビス 8 3 本とビス 9 1 本を外して ペーパーフィーダーの右下カ バー 4 を取り外す PF 740 の場合 5 ビス 8 3 本とビス 10 1 本を外して ペーパーフィーダーの右下カ バー 4 を取り外す 6 ペーパーフィーダーのキャスター 11 2 個をイラストの方向に合わ せ それぞれストッパー K をビス F 1 本で取り付ける 7 ペーパーフィーダーの右下カバー 4 を元通り取り付ける 8 ペーパーフィーダーの右カバー 5 を元通り取り付ける Pour PF 730 5 Déposer les 3 vis 8 et la vis 9 puis déposer le capot inférieur droit d...

Page 774: ...e hay en la base de la multi bandeja lateral A 9 Die Kassette aus dem seitlichen Mehrz weck Papierfach herausziehen den Hebe plattenanschlag 12 entfernen und an der Speicherposition 13 anbringen 10 Den Stift 14 und die Kassette 15 des seitlichen Mehrzweck Papierfachs A her ausnehmen 11 Das seitliche Mehrzweck Papierfach auf dem Papiereinzug P so platzieren dass jeder Stift 16 auf der linken und re...

Page 775: ...tifte Q am Papiereinzug P befestigen 13 Die Kassettenschiene 18 des seitlichen Mehrzweck Papierfachs A herausziehen 14 Die Haken 19 der Schiene 18 an der Öff nung 20 der Kassette 15 montieren und die Kassette wieder anbringen 15 15 Die Kassette 15 mit dem in Schritt 10 ent fernten Stift 14 befestigen 16 Die rechte Abdeckung 21 des seitlichen Mehrzweck Papierfachs A öffnen 17 Nehmen Sie den Riemen ...

Page 776: ...stración 20 Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia S con los 2 tornillos W 18 Die rechte Abdeckung 24 des Papiere inzugs öffnen 19 Die eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit S in der in der Abbildung gezeigten Reihenfolge 25 bis 26 einbauen 20 Die eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit S mit den 2 Schrauben W sichern 18 Aprire il pannello destro 24 dell unità di ali mentazione della carta 19 Inseri...

Page 777: ... 31 21 Den Steckverbinder 27 der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit anschließen 22 Die Klemme T anbringen und das Kabel des Steckverbinders sichern 23 Die Nase 28 der Kabelabdeckung U in die Öffnung 29 in der eingesetzten Papierfördere inheit einsetzen und die Kabelabdeckung U befestigen 24 Die rechte Abdeckung 21 des seitlichen Meh rzweck Papierfachs A wieder anbringen 25 Die rechte Abdeckung des P...

Page 778: ...3 an den entsprechenden Steckverbind ern 34 35 des Seitliches Mehrzweck Papierfach anschließen 28 Die Abdeckung 31 mittels der in Schritt 26 entfernten Schraube 30 wieder anbringen Anschluß des seitlichen Einzugs am MFP Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 13 1 Die untere rechte Abdeckung 1 am MFP öffnen...

Page 779: ... Sie die Papierförderabdeckung 4 des MFP 3 Öffnen Sie die Platte 6 der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 5 des MFP 4 Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben 7 und nehmen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 5 ab 5 Entfernen Sie eine Schraube 9 von der mit tleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 8 2 Aprire il coperchio 4 dell unità di trasporto carta dell MFP 3 Aprire il pannello 6 sul coperchio destro anteriore 5 dell MFP 4 Rim...

Page 780: ...ben 10 heben Sie die mittlere rechte hintere Abdeckung 8 von unten her an und nehmen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 11 ab 7 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben dreher die Platte 13 von der unteren rech ten Abdeckung 12 des Papiereinzugs ab 8 Die rechte Abdeckung 14 des Papiere inzugs öffnen Nehmen Sie den Riemen 15 von der Welle 16 der rechten Abdeckung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 14...

Page 781: ...7 und eine Schraube 18 und nehmen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 19 des Papiereinzugs ab Für PF 740 9 Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben 17 und eine Schraube 20 und nehmen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 19 des Papiereinzugs ab 10 Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung 21 von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 5 ab und die Ablösungsabdeckung 22 von der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 11 Per PF 730 9 Rimuovere l...

Page 782: ... lugar 24 que se indica en la ilustración Vaya al paso 25 11 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben dreher die Platte 23 von der unteren rech ten Abdeckung 1 des MFP ab 12 Zum Anbringen des Films O die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film O dann in der in der Abbildung angegebenen Position 24 anbringen Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 25 11 Rimuovere il pannello 23 dal coperchio destro inferi...

Page 783: ... MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 13 Die rechte Abdeckung 1 25 am MFP öffnen Den Riemen 26 von der Welle 27 abnehmen und dann die rechte Abdeckung 1 25 abnehmen 14 Die rechte Abdeckung 2 28 am MFP öffnen Nehmen Sie den Riemen 29 von der Welle 30 der rechten Abdeck ung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 2 28 ab Installazione sulle MFP a velocità alta 13 Aprire il coperchio destro 1 25 sull MFP Rimuovere la c...

Page 784: ...nen Sie die Papierförderabdeckung 31 des MFP 16 Öffnen Sie die Platte 33 der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 32 des MFP 17 Entfernen Sie 4 Schrauben 34 und nehmen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 32 ab 18 Entfernen Sie eine Schraube 36 von der mittleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 35 15 Aprire il coperchio 31 dell unità di trasporto carta dell MFP 16 Aprire il pannello 33 sul coperchio destro anteriore ...

Page 785: ...ierta derecha inferior 41 19 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schrauben dreher die Platte 38 von der unteren rech ten hinteren Abdeckung 37 ab 20 Entfernen Sie 5 Schrauben 39 heben Sie die mittlere rechte hintere Abdeckung 35 von unten her an und nehmen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 37 ab 21 Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben 40 und nehmen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 41 ab 19 Rimuovere il pannell...

Page 786: ... del MFP 25 con un destornillador de pala plana 22 Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung 42 von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung 32 ab und die Ablösungsabdeckung 43 von der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 37 23 Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte 44 von der rechten Abdeckung 1 25 des MFP ab 22 Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco 42 dal coperchio destro anteriore 32 e il coper chio ...

Page 787: ... bloccaggio D sulla parte anteriore destra dell MFP utilizzando una vite M4 8 F 24 フィルム貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後 イラストの位置 45 にあわせて フィルム O を貼り 付ける 25 ビス M4 8 F 1 本で ロックピン D を MFP 本体右前側に取り付ける 24 Coller le film O sur l emplacement 45 indiqué dans l illustration après avoir soigneusement nettoyé cet emplacement à l alcool 25 Monter une broche de verrouillage D à droite et à l avant du MFP en procédant à l aide d...

Page 788: ...grande B 26 Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise mit einer M4 8 Schraube F den Arretierungsstift D hinten rechts am MFP an 27 Setzen Sie den kleinen Basis Schieber C auf den großen Basis Schieber B Setzen Sie ihn so auf dass die Biegung 47 am kleinen Basis Schieber C innerhalb der Auflage 46 am Ende des großen Basis Schiebers B anliegt 26 Installare un perno di bloccaggio D sulla parte posteriore destra ...

Page 789: ...a tornillo R 28 Den kleinen Basis Schieber C unter der Maschine einsetzen Befestigen Sie ihn mit 2 M4 8 Schrauben F so an der Basis 48 dass der Abstand zwischen dem kleinen Basis Schieber C und dem großen Basis Schieber B 6 2 mm beträgt Bei Modell PF 730 an den mit R markierten Schraublöchern befestigen 28 Inserire lo scivolo di base piccolo C sotto la macchina Installare alla base 48 utilizzando ...

Page 790: ...ter zu Schritt 35 29 Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung 19 des Papiereinzugs wie der an 30 Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 14 des Papiereinzugs wieder an 31 Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 11 wieder an 32 Befestigen Sie eine Schraube 9 an der mittleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 8 33 Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 5 wieder an 34 Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdecku...

Page 791: ...g 41 wieder an 36 Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung 37 wieder an 37 Befestigen Sie eine Schraube 36 an der mittleren rechten hinteren Abdeckung 35 38 Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung 32 wieder an 39 Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 2 28 wieder an 40 Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 1 25 wieder an 41 Befestigen Sie mit der M4 10 Sch neidschraube J die Schalterdruckplatte E Ins...

Page 792: ...nde B 43 Installare il coperchio I utilizzando 2 viti M4 8 F 42 ビス M4 8 F 2 本でベーススライダー大 B にサイドフィーダーを取り付ける その際 ベース スライダー大 B の取付板の平行線 49 にビス M4 8 F のセンターがくるように取り付ける 43 ビス M4 8 F 2 本でカバープレート I を 取り付ける 42 Fixer le plateau d alimentation latéral à la grande règle de base B à l aide de 2 vis M4 8 F Procéder de sorte que l axe des vis M4 8 F recouvre la ligne horizontale 49 du plateau de montage sur la g...

Page 793: ...eta de casete con el número 7 M péguelas en los lugares que se indican en la ilustración 44 Das Signalkabel 51 des seitlichen Einzugs an den Stecker 50 des MFP anschließen 45 Drücken Sie auf den seitlichen Einzug um ihn mit dem MFP zu verbinden 46 Zum Anbringen der Aufkleber Kassettennummer 6 L und Kassettennummer 7 M die Stellen zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und die Aufkleber dann an den in der Abbi...

Page 794: ...e cada bandeja Für PF 730 47 Die einzelnen Kassetten herausziehen dann den Hebeplattenanschlag 52 von jeder Kassette entfernen und an der Speicherposition 53 anbringen Für PF 740 47 Die rechte Papierlade 54 und die linke Papierlade 55 herausziehen jeden der Hebeplattenan schläge 56 entfernen und in der vorgesehenen Position verstauen 48 Alle Kassetten sachte schließen Per PF 730 47 Estrarre ciascu...

Page 795: ... quitó en el paso 49 Wenn 1 Netzkabel vorhanden ist 49 Die Schraube 58 entfernen Wenn 2 Netzkabel vorhanden sind 49 Die 2 Schrauben 57 und 58 entfernen Wenn 1 Netzkabel vorhanden ist 50 Das Netzkabel durch die Klemme N führen und es mit der in Schritt 49 entfernten Schraube 58 befestigen Wenn 2 Netzkabel vorhanden sind 50 Das Netzkabel durch die Klemme N führen und es mit den in Schritt 49 entfern...

Page 796: ...rencia diferencia izquierda derecha de 1 5 mm o menor Einsetzen der Papierformatplatte und der Medientypplatte Die Platten halb zusammenklappen und in die Öffnungen für Format bzw Medientyp ein schieben Näheres hierzu siehe Bedienungs anleitung Einstellung bei verkantetem Papiereinzug nur PF 730 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am Hauptschalter ei...

Page 797: ...ra verificar la imagen 4 Ziehen Sie die Papierlade 1 aus dem Papiereinzug und lösen Sie die 4 Schrauben 2 5 Drehen Sie die Einstellschraube 3 um die Cursor Verkantung zu korrigieren 6 Ziehen Sie die 4 Schrauben 2 wieder an 7 Erstellen Sie zur Überprüfung des Bilds noch einmal eine Testkopie 4 Estrarre il cassetto 1 dell unità di alimentazione della carta e quindi allentare le 4 viti 2 5 Ruotare la...

Page 798: ...el cursor frontal de la plataforma 5 Ändern des Papierformats PF 740 nur metri sche Spezifikationen Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zollmaß das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen mit metrischem Maß das Format A4 Das Format kann wie folgend auf B5 umge schaltet werden 1 Ziehen Sie die Papierlade aus dem Papiereinzug 2 Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel 4 um 90 drehen und den vorderen...

Page 799: ...forma 6 Libere el gancho 9 y quite el cursor del borde inferior de la plataforma 10 3 Den vorderen Konsole Cursor 5 so verschieben dass er mit den Formatanzeigen oben 7 und unten 6 an der Kassette fluchtet 4 Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel 4 zum Verriegeln um 90 drehen 5 Den hinteren Konsole Cursor 8 auf gleiche Weise verschieben 6 Den Haken 9 lösen und den Hinterkante Cursor 10 der Konsole abnehm...

Page 800: ...provocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel 7 Den Unter Cursor 11 anheben 8 Auf die Formatanzeige 12 ausrichten den Haken 13 einsetzen und den Hinterkante Cursor 10 der Konsole anbringen Einstellen der Cursor Breite nur PF 740 1 Papier in die Papierladen einlegen 2 Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 5 und dem Papier 14 außerhalb des Bereichs 0 5 bis 1 5 mm liegt wen...

Page 801: ...sea de entre 0 5 y 1 5 mm 3 Einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher in die 2 langen Öffnungen 15 im vorderen Konsole Cursor 5 stecken und die 2 Einstellschrauben 16 lösen Danach den vorderen Konsole Cursor 5 verschieben 4 Die 2 Einstellschrauben 16 wieder anzie hen 5 Vergewissern Sie sich dass der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole Cursor 5 und dem Papier im Bereich 0 5 bis 1 5 mm liegt 3 Inserire un...

Page 802: ...ción Einstellen der Mittenlinie Der Bezugswert für die Mittenlinie ist 0 5 mm oder weniger an Position f des korrekten Bilds e Falls die Mittenlinie außerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen 1 In den Wartungsmodus U304 schalten und LSU Out Left und Cassette 5 Cassette 6 oder Cassette 7 wählen 2 Die Werte einstellen Testmuster g Den Einstellwert erhöhen Testmuster h Den E...

Page 803: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR 1000 SHEETS FINISHER ...

Page 804: ...de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Dokument Finishers 1 B Auswerffach 1 C Obere Grundplatte 1 D Untere Grundplatte 1 Deutsch E Verbindungsplatte 1 F Kabelführung 1 G Auswerfführung 1 H Heftklammermagazin 1 I M4 8 Schraube 3 J M4 30 Schraube 2 K M4 10 Schraube schwarz 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Parti di fornitura A Fi...

Page 805: ...de la parte posterior de la bandeja de salida B en los orificios 2 del elevador del finaliza dor de documentos A HINWEIS Das Gerätezusatz AK 730 muss installiert werden bevor man den Dokument Finisher installiert Verfahren Vor dem Einbau des Dokument Finishers muss der MFP Hauptschalter aktiviert und das Netzk abel von der Steckdose abgezogen sein 1 Setzen Sie die 2 Haken 1 zur Befestigung an der ...

Page 806: ... cubierta izquierda 2 Befestigen Sie die obere Grundplatte C und die untere Grundplatte D mit M4 8 Schrauben I 3 Bringen Sie die Auswerfführung G an indem Sie die 2 Auswerfführungsstifte 3 in die Öffnungen des MFP stecken 4 Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte E mit 2 M4 30 Schrauben J am MFP an 5 Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung 25 von der linken Abdeckung ab 2 Fissare la piastra di messa a terra s...

Page 807: ...o se describe en la página 7 6 Entfernen Sie das Band und die hintere Abdeckung 4 7 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 5 und ziehen Sie den Fixierrahmen 6 nach außen her aus Die Verbindungsöffnungen 7 sind nun sichtbar 8 Stecken Sie die 2 Stifte 8 an der Verbind ungsplatte E in die Verbindungsöffnungen 7 des Dokument Finishers um den Doku ment Finisher mit dem MFP zu verbinden Falls Sie den Dokument Finis...

Page 808: ...ctela al conec tor 10 de la MFP 9 Drücken Sie den Fixierrahmen 6 ganz ein damit die Fixierrahmenrippen in die Stiftschlitze greifen 10 Befestigen Sie den Fixierrahmen 6 mit der in Schritt 7 entfernten Schraube 5 11 Bringen Sie die Kabelführung F mit der M4 8 Schraube I an 12 Führen Sie die Signalleitung 9 durch die Kabelführung F und schließen Sie sie am Steckverbinder 10 des MFP an 9 Spingere com...

Page 809: ...l 12 13 Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung 4 mit der M4 10 Schraube K an 14 Bringen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung 11 am MFP an Die beim Installieren des AK 730 entfernte Abdeckung 15 Öffnen Sie die vordere Abdeckung 12 des Dokument Finishers und setzen Sie das Heftklammermagazin H ein 16 Schließen Sie die vordere Abdeckung 12 13 Installare il pannello anteriore 4 utilizzando la vite M4 10 K 14 In...

Page 810: ...en con las especificaciones utilice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la altura Einstellen der Höhe 1 Vergewissern Sie sich dass die jeweilige Höhe der Stifte 8 der am MFP ange brachten Verbindungsplatte und die Verbind ungsöffnungen 7 am Dokument Finisher den nachstehenden Vorgaben entsprechen Korrekt Der Durchmesser a des Stifts 8 befindet sich im Höhenbereich b des Kurvenabschnitts 13 Nic...

Page 811: ...ontal y derecho posterior del finaliza dor de documentos 2 Entfernen Sie sämtliche Schrauben 14 und nehmen Sie die Vorderfußabdeckung 15 und die Hinterfußabdeckung 16 3 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 17 um den Schlüssel 18 abzunehmen 4 Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben 19 vorne rechts und hinten rechts am Dokument Finisher 2 Rimuovere ciascuna delle viti 14 e quindi rimuovere la copertura del piede anteriore ...

Page 812: ...2 no son iguales uti lice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la separación 5 Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben 20 mit dem Schlüssel 18 um die Höhe des Dokument Fin ishers einzustellen Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Dokument Finisher angehoben während er durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird 6 Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben 19 wieder an und verstauen Si...

Page 813: ...ta de la pata frontal 15 y la cubierta de la pata posterior 16 8 Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben 23 vorne links und hinten links am Dokument Finisher 9 Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben 24 mit einem Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein um die Höhe des Dokument Finishers zu korrigieren Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Dokument Finisher angehoben während er durch Drehen entgegen dem ...

Page 814: ...e referencia 78 5 mm 2 5 mm del centro del papel Einstellen der Heftposition 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am Hauptschalter ein 2 Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus doppelt geheftet 3 Prüfen Sie ob die Heftposition außermittig ist Falls die Heftposition außermittig ist müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen Bezugswert 78 5 mm 2 5 mm von ...

Page 815: ...e referencia 78 5 mm 2 5 mm del centro del pape 4 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Staple HP 5 Die Werte einstellen Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts a abgesta pelt wird Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts b abgestapelt wird Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert 6 Eine Testkopie erstellen 7 Wiederholen Sie die S...

Page 816: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR 4000 SHEETS FINISHER ...

Page 817: ...ticas de 65 y 80 ppm Español Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 30 30 35 35 45 45 und 55 50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 35 45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65 65 und 75 70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 65 und 80 ppm Mono chrommaschinen Deutsch I riferimenti per l...

Page 818: ...tiguador de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Dokument Finishers 1 B Auswerffach 1 C Obere Grundplatte 1 D Grundanschlussplatte 1 E Grundfeder 1 F Verbindungsplatte 1 G Kabelführung 1 H Auswerfführung 1 I Heftklammermagazin 1 J M4 8 Schraube 4 K M4 30 Schraube 2 L M4 10 Schraube schwarz 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Parti...

Page 819: ...sterior de la bandeja de salida B en los orificios 2 del elevador del finaliza dor de documentos A HINWEIS Bei der Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse muss der Gerätezusatz AK 730 installiert werden bevor man den Doku ment Finisher installiert Verfahren Vor dem Einbau des Dokument Finishers muss der MFP Hauptschalter aktiviert und das Netzk abel von der Steckdose abgezogen sein...

Page 820: ...l finalizador de documen tos usando un tornillo M4 8 J Vaya al paso 7 2 Befestigen Sie die obere Grundplatte C mit einer M4 8 Schraube J Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse 3 Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder E mit einer M4 8 Schraube J an der mit 55 bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte D 4 Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte D mit einer M4 8 Schraube J mittig an der Unterseite ...

Page 821: ...olador 5 Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 3 Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder E mit einer M4 8 Schraube J an der mit 65 bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte D 4 Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte D mit einer M4 8 Schraube J vorne an der Unterseite des Dokument Finishers an Nur bei Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Lei...

Page 822: ...Bringen Sie die Auswerfführung H an indem Sie die 2 Auswerfführungsstifte 6 in die Öffnungen des MFP stecken 8 Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte F mit 2 M4 30 Schrauben K am MFP an Nur bei Installation eines MFP der mittleren Leis tungsklasse Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 10 9 Nehmen Sie die Ablösungsabdeckung 30 von der linken Abdeckung ab 10 En...

Page 823: ... paso 11 11 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 8 und ziehen Sie den Fixierrahmen 9 nach außen her aus Die Verbindungsöffnungen 10 sind nun sichtbar 12 Stecken Sie die 2 Stifte 11 an der Verbind ungsplatte F in die Verbindungsöffnungen 10 des Dokument Finishers um den Doku ment Finisher mit dem MFP zu verbinden Falls Sie den Dokument Finisher nicht anschließen können sollten Sie die Höhe wie auf Seite 8 be...

Page 824: ...osterior 7 por medio del tornillo M4 10 L 15 Bringen Sie die Kabelführung G mit der M4 8 Schraube J an 16 Führen Sie die Signalleitung 12 durch die Kabelführung G und schließen Sie sie am Steckverbinder 13 des MFP an 17 Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung 7 mit der M4 10 Schraube L an 15 Installare la guida cavi G utilizzando la vite M4 8 J 16 Far passare il cavo del segnale 12 attra verso la guida ...

Page 825: ...dares 18 Bringen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung 3 am MFP an Bei Installation an MFP der mittleren Leis tungsklasse die beim Installieren des AK 730 abgenommene Abdeckung 19 Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 14 des Dokument Finishers und setzen Sie das Heftklammermagazin I ein 20 Schließen Sie die vordere Abdeckung 14 Einstellen der Höhe 1 Vergewissern Sie sich dass die jeweilige Höhe der Sti...

Page 826: ...ite el tornillo 16 y abra la cubierta frontal inferior 17 Korrekt Der Durchmesser A des Stifts 11 befindet sich im Höhenbereich B des Kurvenabschnitts 15 Nicht korrekt Der Durchmesser A des Stifts 11 ragt über den Höhenbereich B des Kurvenab schnitts 15 hinaus Falls die Höhen nicht korrekt sind müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen 2 Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 14 des Dokument Finishers...

Page 827: ...del finaliza dor de documentos 4 Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben 18 und nehmen Sie die Fußabdeckung 19 ab 5 Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben 20 und nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung 21 ab 6 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 22 um den Schlüssel 23 abzunehmen 7 Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben 24 vorne rechts und hinten rechts am Dokument Finisher 4 Rimuovere le 2 viti 18 e quindi rimuovere la copertura del pied...

Page 828: ...7 no son iguales uti lice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la separación 8 Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben 25 mit dem Schlüssel 23 um die Höhe des Dokument Fin ishers einzustellen Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Dokument Finisher angehoben während er durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird 9 Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben 24 wieder an und verstauen Si...

Page 829: ...ubierta de la pata 19 y la cubierta posterior inferior 21 11 Lösen Sie die 2 Schrauben 28 vorne links und hinten links am Dokument Finisher 12 Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben 29 mit einem Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein um die Höhe des Dokument Finishers zu korrigieren Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzei gersinn wird der Dokument Finisher ange hoben während er durch Drehen entgegen dem U...

Page 830: ...e referencia 78 5 mm 2 5 mm del centro del papel Einstellen der Heftposition 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am Hauptschalter ein 2 Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus doppelt geheftet 3 Prüfen Sie ob die Heftposition außermittig ist Falls die Heftposition außermittig ist müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen Bezugswert 78 5 mm 2 5 mm von ...

Page 831: ...e referencia 78 5 mm 2 5 mm del centro del pape 4 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Staple HP 5 Die Werte einstellen Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts a abgesta pelt wird Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts b abgestapelt wird Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert 6 Eine Testkopie erstellen 7 Wiederholen Sie die S...

Page 832: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR FINISHER ATTACHMENT KIT ...

Page 833: ...ierta frontal superior 1 K Cubierta de conexiones izquierda 1 Gelieferte Teile A Antriebseinheit 1 B Papiereinzugseinheit 1 C Abdeckung der Papiereinzugseinheit 1 D Kantenschutz 1 Deutsch E Hintere linke Stütze 1 F Linke Scanner Abdeckung 1 G Vordere linke Stütze 1 H Auswerfeinheit 1 I Kabelhalter 1 J Obere vordere Abdeckung 1 K Linke Verbindungsabdeckung 1 Parti di fornitura A Unità guida 1 B Uni...

Page 834: ...tado y que su cable de ali mentación esté desenchufado de la toma de corriente L Linke Abdeckung 1 M Obere linke Abdeckung 1 N Papierfördereinheit 1 O M4 8 Schraube 7 P M4 20 Schraube 4 Q P Tite Schraube M3 8 1 R Untere Verbindungsabdeckung 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Vor dem Einbau des AK 730 muss der MFP Hauptschalter ausgeschal...

Page 835: ...erda del escáner 6 Verfahren 1 Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben 2 in der linken ISU Abdeckung 1 2 Drücken Sie die Haken 3 oben und unten ein und öffnen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeck ung 4 3 Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben 5 im Innern der Schnittstellenabdeckung 4 und nehmen Sie die linke Scanner Abdeckung 6 ab Procedura 1 Rimuovere le 2 viti 2 sul coperchio ISU sin istro 1 2 Spingere i ganci 3 superiore...

Page 836: ...Sie die vordere Abdeckung 7 am MFP 5 Ziehen Sie die Papierfördererabdeckung 8 heraus 6 Heben Sie das Bedienfeld 9 in die oberste Position falls es gesenkt ist 7 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 11 von der Lüfterabdeckung 10 8 Entfernen Sie die Schraube 12 und ziehen Sie die obere rechte Abdeckung 13 leicht nach außen während Sie gleichzeitig die vordere rechte Abdeckung 14 abnehmen 9 Entfernen Sie die A...

Page 837: ...s M4 8 negro 16 quitados en el paso 10 10 Entfernen Sie die 2 M4 8 schwarz Schrauben 16 und nehmen Sie die hintere Fachabdeckung 17 und die Scanner Bode nabdeckung 18 ab 11 Setzen Sie den Haken 19 an der Oberseite der Antriebseinheit A und den Vorsprung 20 an der Unterseite in die entsprechenden Positionierungsöffnungen 21 22 der Rückplatte ein und sichern Sie die Antriebseinheit mit den 2 in Schr...

Page 838: ...nto del actuador 12 Nehmen Sie die Abdeckung der Papierein zugseinheit C von der Papiereinzugs einheit B ab 13 Setzen Sie den Vorsprung 23 an der Papiereinzugseinheit B in die Öffnung 24 der Antriebseinheit A ein und setzen Sie den Vorsprung 25 in die Öffnung 26 im MFP Rahmen ein um die Papiereinzugsein heit B anzubringen Drücken Sie die Papiereinzugseinheit B nach rechts und drücken Sie den Vorsp...

Page 839: ... en posición 14 Bringen Sie den Kantenschutz D an der Seitenplatte an führen Sie das Kabel von der Antriebseinheit A durch den Kanten schutz D und befestigen Sie es 15 Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprünge 28 der hin teren linken Stütze E in die Öffnungen 29 der Seitenplatte ein und sichern Sie die hin tere linke Stütze E mit der M4 8 Schraube O 16 Setzen Sie das Klemmschellenband 30 am Kabel von der Antrie...

Page 840: ...os M4 20 P 17 Setzen Sie den Haken 32 an der linken Scanner Abdeckung F in die Öffnung der Seitenplatte und sichern Sie die linke Scan ner Abdeckung F mit der M4 8 Schraube O 18 Befestigen Sie die 2 Schrauben 2 an der linken ISU Abdeckung 1 19 Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprünge 33 der vor deren linken Stütze G in die Öffnungen der linken Abdeckung am MFP ein und befesti gen Sie die vordere linke Stütze G...

Page 841: ... aus dass der Schienenabschnitt 34 im MFP sitzt setzen Sie den Vorsprung 35 auf der Rückseite in die Öff nung der Seitenplatte ein und setzen Sie dann das Vorderteil auf den Plattenabschnitt 37 an der vorderen linken Stütze G HINWEIS Achten Sie beim Montieren der Auswerfeinheit H darauf dass das Kabel 36 der Antriebseinheit nicht eingeklemmt wird 21 Ziehen Sie die in Schritt 19 provisorisch angezo...

Page 842: ...rnillo M4 8 O 23 Stecken Sie die 3 Stecker 38 in die Aus werfeinheit H und den MFP 24 Befestigen Sie die Kabel mit den 2 Kabelhal tern I 25 Positionieren Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung J so dass das Schraubengehäuse 39 nicht die vordere linke Stütze G berührt und richten Sie die Vorsprünge 40 auf die 2 Öffnungen an der rechten Seite der oberen vorderen Abdeckung J aus bevor Sie die obere vordere ...

Page 843: ...e Abdeckung 14 mit der in Schritt 8 entfernten Schraube 12 an Befestigen Sie die Lüfterabdeckung 10 mit der in Schritt 7 entfernten Schraube 11 Vergewissern Sie sich dass der Stecker auf der Innenseite der Lüfterabdeckung 10 nicht abgetrennt wurde 27 Setzen Sie die Abdeckung C der Papiere inzugseinheit in die Papiereinzugseinheit B ein 28 Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprünge 41 an der linken Verbindungsabd...

Page 844: ...deckung 42 Bringen Sie nach der Installation des Doku ment Finishers wieder die Schnittstellenab deckung 42 an 30 Bringen Sie die linke Abdeckung L mit den in Schritt 3 entfernten 2 Schrauben 5 an 31 Öffnen Sie die Auswerfabdeckung 43 32 Bringen Sie die obere linke Abdeckung M wieder an und schließen Sie die Auswerfab deckung 43 33 Bringen Sie die untere Verbindungsabdeck ung R mit den 2 M4 20 Sch...

Page 845: ...2 Schlittenschienen 44 aus dem MFP heraus 35 Richten Sie die 4 Haken 45 der Schlitten schienen 44 auf die Einkerbungen der Papierfördereinheit N aus und setzen Sie die Papierfördereinheit N auf die Schlitten schienen 44 36 Verschieben Sie die Schlittenschienen 44 nach hinten und befestigen Sie die Papierfördereinheit N mit den 4 Haken 45 Vergewissern Sie sich durch die Öffnung 46 dass die Haken or...

Page 846: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR CENTER FOLDING UNIT ...

Page 847: ...to 1 Gelieferte Teile A Mittenfalteinheit 1 B Vordere Schiene 1 C Hintere Schiene 1 D Ausgabeanschlag 1 Deutsch E Vordere Seitenabdeckung 1 F Hintere Seitenabdeckung 1 G Ausgabestapelfach 1 H Ausgabefach 1 I Eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit 1 J Stift 1 K M4 8 Schraube 11 L M4 10 Schraube schwarz 2 M M4 12 Schraube 4 N Sperrplatte 2 O Schellenband 1 P Führung 1 Q D7 Aufkleber 1 R Bedienungsaufkleber...

Page 848: ...und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Verfahren Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Mittenfalteinheit beginnen stellen Sie sicher dass der Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist Bringen Sie den Dokument Finisher zuerst und dann erst die Mittenfalteinheit an 1 Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung 1 des Dokument Finishers ...

Page 849: ...edia inferior 9 3 Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben 4 und nehmen Sie die Fußabdeckung 5 ab 4 Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben 6 und nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung 7 ab 5 Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben 8 und nehmen Sie die untere mittlere Abdeckung 9 ab 3 Rimuovere le 2 viti 4 e quindi rimuovere la copertura del piede 5 4 Rimuovere le 3 viti 6 e quindi rimuovere il coperchio inferiore posteriore 7...

Page 850: ...la misma forma 6 Montieren Sie die Sperrplatten N an den vorderen und hinteren Stützen mit jeweils einer M4 8 Schraube K 7 Setzen Sie den Haken 11 der vorderen Schiene B in die Aussparung 10 vorne am Dokument Finisher ein und setzen Sie dabei auch den Vor sprung 13 an der vorderen Schiene B in die Öff nung 12 des Dokument Finishers ein 8 Befestigen Sie die vordere Schiene B mit den 2 M4 12 Schraub...

Page 851: ... el cable 17 La cinta de fijación 18 se quita en el paso 15 10 Setzen Sie die linken Rollen 14 an der Vorderseite und Rückseite der Mittenfalteinheit A auf die Bahnen 15 an den Innenseiten der Schienen und rollen Sie sie in der dargestellten Richtung Die mittleren Rollen 16 rollen nun auf die Schienen 11 Schieben Sie die Mittenfalteinheit A entlang den Schienen in den Dokument Finisher ein HINWEIS...

Page 852: ...dor I usando 4 tornillos M4 8 K 12 Lösen Sie den Verriegelungshebel 19 und ziehen Sie die Mittenfalteinheit A zur linken Seite des Dokument Finishers heraus 13 Richten Sie die Öffnungen 21 der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit I auf die 2 Vorsprünge 20 des Dokument Finishers aus Montieren Sie so dass die Lippe 22 am oberen Rahmen der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit auf dem Rahmen des Dokument Fini...

Page 853: ... 15 Entfernen Sie das Klebeband 18 für die Kabelführung 17 und stecken Sie die Rändelschraube J in die Kabelführung 17 wobei der Rahmen 25 zwischen den 2 Vorsprüngen 24 liegen muss HINWEIS Stecken Sie die Rändelschraube J ein um die Kabel in der Kabelführung 17 zu halten 16 Schrauben Sie die Rändelschraube J in den Dokument Finisher um die Kabelführung 17 zu verankern 15 Rimuovere il nastro di fis...

Page 854: ...7 Montieren Sie das Massekabel 26 mit einer M4 8 Schraube K an den Rahmen 18 Bringen Sie das Schellenband O an den Kabeln an und setzen Sie das Band in den Rahmen ein 19 Verbinden Sie die 2 Steckverbinder 27 mit den Steckverbindern 28 des Dokument Finishers 20 Verbinden Sie den Steckverbinder 29 mit dem Steckverbinder 30 der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit I 21 Richten Sie die Öffnungen 32 an 2 S...

Page 855: ...e Auswurfabdeckung 33 24 Hängen Sie den Vorsprung 34 und den Haken 35 der vorderen Seitenabdeckung E in die Mittenfalteinheit A ein Befestigen Sie die vordere Seitenabdeckung E mit einer M4 10 Schraube schwarz L 25 Hängen Sie den Vorsprung 36 und den Haken 37 der hinteren Seitenabdeckung F in die Mittenfalteinheit A ein Befestigen Sie die hintere Seitenabdeckung F mit einer M4 10 Schraube schwarz ...

Page 856: ...de salida H 28 Cierre la cubierta de expulsión 33 26 Stecken Sie die 2 Rändelschrauben 38 des Ausgabefachs H in die Öffnungen der Mittenfal teinheit A ein um das Fach zu installieren 27 Bringen Sie das Ausgabestapelfach G am Ausgabefach H an 28 Schließen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung 33 26 Inserire i 2 perni 38 sul vassoio di uscita H nei fori sull unità di piegatura centrale A per instal lare il vasso...

Page 857: ...eta D7 Q en el lugar que se muestra en la ilustración 29 Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprünge 39 auf der Rückseite des Ausgabeanschlags D in die mit Kreis bezeichneten Positionen der Mittenfalteinheit A ein Setzen Sie die 3 Haken 40 des Ausgabeanschlags D in die Öffnungen 41 der Mittenfaltein heit A ein 30 Kleben Sie den D7 Aufkleber Q an der abgebildeten Stelle an 29 Inserire le 2 sporgenze 39 sulla parte...

Page 858: ...ierre la cubierta frontal inferior 3 y la cubierta frontal superior 1 31 Kleben Sie den Bedienungsaufkleber R an der abgebildeten Stelle an 32 Bringen Sie die Fußabdeckung 5 und die untere hintere Abdeckung 7 wieder an 33 Schließen Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung 3 und die obere vordere Abdeckung 1 31 Far aderire l etichetta di operazione R alla posizione mostrata nella figura 32 Reinstallare la ...

Page 859: ...es 3 Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellung der Mittenfalt Heftposition Überprüfen Sie den Abstand a zwischen der Heftposition und der Papier mitte Falls der Abstand a größer als der Bezugswert ist ist die Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen Bezugswert a 2 mm 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Booklet und Staple Pos 2 Die W...

Page 860: ...ara confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellung der Mittenfaltposition Überprüfen Sie den Abstand b zwischen der Papierkante und der Mit tenfaltposition Falls der Abstand b größer als der Bezugswert ist ist die Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen Bezugswert b A4 Letter Papierlänge 1 2 2 mm A3 Ledger B4 Papierlänge 1 2 3 mm 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie...

Page 861: ...cla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración Einstellung der Dreilagenfaltposition Überprüfen Sie den Abstand c zwischen der Papierkante und der zweiten Faltposition Falls der Abstand c größer als der Bezugswert ist ist die Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen Bezugswert c 7 0 2 mm 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Booklet und Three Fold 2 Die Werte ei...

Page 862: ...es Consulte las instrucciones para la instalación de accesorios en el lugar del cliente Modelo DF 790 HINWEIS Dieses Zubehör ist nur für den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten Kopiermaschine vorgesehen Installieren Sie das Zubehör gemäß der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld Modell DF 790 NOTIFICA Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dell app...

Page 863: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR MAILBOX ...

Page 864: ...gar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministra das Gelieferte Teile A Mailbox 1 B Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte 1 C Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte 1 D Kopienausgabefächer 7 Deutsch E M4 12 Schraube 2 F Fachnamenaufkleber für Benutzer 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Parti di fornitura A Casella posta...

Page 865: ...arte superior del finalizador 1 utilizando un destornillador de punta plana o similar Verfahren Schalten Sie vor der Installation der Mailbox unbedingt den Hauptschalter des MFP aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Netzsteck dose 1 Entfernen Sie die vordere obere Abdeckung 2 und die hintere obere Abdeckung 3 an der Oberseite des Finishers 1 mit einem Klingenschraubendreher oder dergleichen P...

Page 866: ...de correo A hacia arriba para asegurarse de que el buzón de correo A no queda suspendido 2 Setzen Sie die Haken 4 an der Vorder und Rückseite der Mailbox A in die Öffnungen 5 vorne und hinten an der Oberseite des Finishers 1 ein wie in der Abbildung dargestellt und bringen Sie die Mailbox A am Finisher 1 an Hinweis Heben Sie die Mailbox A vorne und hinten etwas an um sicher zu stellen dass die Mai...

Page 867: ...ar la cubierta trasera 6 3 Befestigen Sie die Vorderseite und die Rück seite der Mailbox A mit einer M4 12 Schraube E am Finisher 4 Nehmen Sie die hintere Abdeckung 6 der Mailbox A ab 5 Entfernen Sie das Band vom Steckverbinder 7 der Mailbox A und stecken Sie ihn in den Steckverbinder 8 am Finisher 6 Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung 6 wieder an 3 Fissare ciascuna parte anteriore e posteriore dell...

Page 868: ...anera la cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera C en el finaliza dor 7 Setzen Sie die 2 Haken 9 an der vorderen Abdeckung der Montageplatte B für die Mailbox in den Finisher ein um die Abdeck ung B zu installieren 8 Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise die hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte C am Fin isher an 7 Inserire nel finitore i 2 ganci 9 posizionati sul coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteri...

Page 869: ...ienda el interruptor prin cipal del MFP para verificar el funciona miento 9 Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefächer D in den Ausgabeabschnitt der Mailbox A ein beginnend vom untersten Fach zum höchsten Drücken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs D zusammen um es etwas zu biegen und setzen Sie das Fach ein indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte 10 in die Rundlöcher 11 vorne und hinten an...

Page 870: ...es Consulte las instrucciones para la instalación de accesorios en el lugar del cliente Modelo DF 790 HINWEIS Dieses Zubehör ist nur für den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten Kopiermaschine vorgesehen Installieren Sie das Zubehör gemäß der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld Modell DF 790 NOTIFICA Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dell app...

Page 871: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR PUNCH UNIT ...

Page 872: ...lieferte Teile A Locherführung 1 B Lochereinheit 1 C Motoreinheit 1 D Anschlagring 1 Deutsch E Feder 1 F Locher PWB 1 G Lochungsabfallbehälter 1 H M3 8 Passstift Verbundschrauben 3 I Aufkleberbogen 1 J Film 1 K Kleine Klemme für DF 770 1 L Große Klemme für DF 790 1 M Ferritkern 1 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Parti di fornitura A Guid...

Page 873: ...ite la cubierta trasera superior 4 Verfahren Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Lochereinheit beginnen stellen Sie sicher dass der Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist Bringen Sie den Dokument Finisher zuerst und dann erst die Lochereinheit an Entfernen der Abdeckung DF 770 Zur Installation des DF 790 weitergehen zu Schritt 1 auf Seite 3 1 Die Schraub...

Page 874: ...de la guía 10 hacia fuera Entfernen der Abdeckung DF 790 1 Die Schraube 5 entfernen und die kleine hintere Abdeckung 6 abnehmen 2 Die 3 Schrauben 7 entfernen und die obere hintere Abdeckung 8 abnehmen Anbringen der Lochereinheit 3 Die Schraube 9 entfernen und die Führung 10 nach außen ziehen Rimozione del coperchio DF 790 1 Rimuovere la vite 5 e quindi rimuovere il pannello posteriore piccolo 6 2 ...

Page 875: ... la parte ombreggiata 38 del motore illustrata per l adesione della pellicola J far aderire la pellicola 4 モーター斜線部 38 の貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後 フィルム J を貼り付ける 4 Après avoir utilisé de l alcool pour nettoyer la partie du moteur hachurée 38 sur laquelle le film J est apposé coller ce film 4 用酒精清洁电机斜侧处 38 的粘贴位置后 粘贴胶片 J 4 모터 사선부 38 의 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 필름 J 을 부착합니다 4 Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la part...

Page 876: ...del finalizador de documentos 12 6 Inserte la perforadora B en el finalizador de documentos 5 Die Locherführung A so einsetzen dass die Vorderkante der Führung 11 unter dem Rahmen 12 des Dokument Finishers liegt 6 Die Lochereinheit B in den Dokument Fin isher einsetzen 5 Installare la guida perforazione A in modo che il bordo principale della guida 11 sia sotto il telaio 12 della finitrice di docu...

Page 877: ...unidad motriz C con los 2 tornil los H 7 Die Lochereinheit B leicht anheben und den Haken 13 an der Motoreinheit C in die Nut 14 des Dokument Finishers einsetzen Dabei auch die Stange 15 an der Motoreinheit C in die Öffnung 16 der Lochereinheit B einstecken 8 Die Motoreinheit C mit den 2 Schrauben H sichern 7 Sollevare leggermente l unità di perforazione B ed inserire il gancio 13 sull unità motor...

Page 878: ...la unidad motriz 19 9 Den Anschlagring D auf die Stange 15 der Motoreinheit setzen und die Feder E zwischen Lochereinheit und Motoreinheit einsetzen 10 Das Kabel 17 der Lochereinheit durch den Kantenschutz 18 der Motoreinheit führen 11 Das Kabel vom Motor der Lochereinheit an den Steckverbinder der Motoreinheit 19 anschließen 9 Inserire l anello di bloccaggio D sull asta 15 dell unità motore ed in...

Page 879: ...tallation der Locher PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters DF 770 Zur Installation des DF 790 weitergehen zu Schritt 12 auf Seite 12 12 Die 2 Haken 20 in der Locher PWB F in die Aussparung 21 am Dokument Finisher einset zen Dabei auch den Vorsprung 23 am Dokument Finisher in die Öffnung 22 auf der Locher PWB F einsetzen 13 Mit der Schraube H das Massekabel 24 der Lochereinheit an der Locher PWB F fe...

Page 880: ...ora 17 Fije el núcleo de ferrita M al cable 15 Die 2 Kabel der Locher PWB an die Steck verbinder 27 der DF Haupt PWB 26 anschließen 16 Die kleine Klemme K am Finisher anbringen dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der Lochereinheit hindurchführen und befestigen 17 Den Ferritkern M am Kabel befestigen 15 Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione nei connettori 27 sulla ...

Page 881: ...a cubierta delantera superior 28 e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación G 18 Die obere hintere Abdeckung 4 und die kle ine hintere Abdeckung 2 wieder einsetzen 19 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 28 öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter G einsetzen 18 Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 4 e il pannello posteriore piccolo 2 19 Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore 28 ed inserire lo ...

Page 882: ...tes y péguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustración B C 21 Cierre la cubierta delantera superior 28 20 Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen J an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen B C 21 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 28 schließen 20 Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol applicare le seguenti etichette del ...

Page 883: ...oración F Installation der Locher PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters DF 790 12 Die 2 Haken 29 in der Locher PWB F in die Aussparung 30 am Dokument Finisher einset zen Dabei auch den Vorsprung 32 am Dokument Finisher in die Öffnung 31 auf der Locher PWB F einsetzen 13 Mit der Schraube H das Massekabel 33 der Lochereinheit an der Locher PWB F festziehen 14 Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck...

Page 884: ...adora 17 Fije el núcleo de ferrita M al cable 15 Die 2 Kabel der Locher PWB an die Steck verbinder 36 der DF Haupt PWB 35 anschließen 16 Die große Klemme L am Finisher anbringen dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der Lochereinheit hindurchführen und befestigen 17 Den Ferritkern M am Kabel befestigen 15 Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione nei connettori 36 sulla...

Page 885: ...a cubierta delantera superior 37 e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación G 18 Die obere hintere Abdeckung 8 und die kle ine hintere Abdeckung 6 wieder einsetzen 19 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 37 öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter G einsetzen 18 Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 8 e il pannello posteriore piccolo 6 19 Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore 37 ed inserire lo ...

Page 886: ...tes y péguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustración A C 21 Cierre la cubierta delantera superior 37 20 Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen J an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen A C 21 Die obere vordere Abdeckung 37 schließen 20 Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol applicare le seguenti etichette del ...

Page 887: ...ón Einstellen der Lochungsposition 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am Hauptschalter ein 2 Eine Testkopie im Lochungsmodus erstellen 3 Falls eine außermittige Lochung erfolgte ist die Lochungsposition wie folgend nachzustellen Einstellen der Lochungsregistrierung 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Regist 2 Die W...

Page 888: ...ón Valor de referencia c Sistema métrico 13 mm en pulgadas 9 5 mm Einstellen des Transports der Lochungsposition 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Feed 2 Die Werte einstellen Falls die Lochungsposition näher an der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert c erlaubt Den Einstellwert erhöhen Falls die Lochungsposition ferner von der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert c erlaubt...

Page 889: ...tanzlochposition 1 Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246 wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Width 2 Die Werte einstellen Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gerätefront liegt Den Einstellwert verringern Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gerätefront liegt Den Einstellwert erhöhen 3 Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start Taste bestätigen Bezugswert Metrischer Abstand d 80 mm 0 5 e 40 mm 2 Abstand in Z...

Page 890: ...s instrucciones para la instalación de accesorios en el lugar del cliente Modelo DF 770 DF 790 HINWEIS Dieses Zubehör ist nur für den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten Kopiermaschine vorgesehen Installieren Sie das Zubehör gemäß der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld Modell DF 770 DF 790 NOTIFICA Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dell app...

Page 891: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR INNER JOB SEPARATOR ...

Page 892: ...1 2 3 A B ...

Page 893: ...7 8 4 5 6 ...

Page 894: ...11 9 10 ...

Page 895: ...A 1 2 3 2 14 15 12 13 16 ...

Page 896: ...B 3 2 1 2 19 17 18 ...

Page 897: ...21 22 20 ...

Page 898: ...26 27 23 24 28 25 ...

Page 899: ...30 29 ...

Page 900: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR RIGHT JOB SEPARATOR ...

Page 901: ...5 1 2 3 4 5 7 7 6 A B C A B ...

Page 902: ...9 10 11 12 13 14 7 8 Ԙ ԙ Ԙ ԙ C ...

Page 903: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR FAX SYSTEM ...

Page 904: ...eiterplatte finden Sie auf Seite 1 Angaben zur Installation der FAX Leiterplatte als Dual FAX finden Sie auf Seite 17 Angaben für MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 30 30 35 35 45 45 und 55 50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie für die 35 45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen Angaben für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten für die 65 65 und 75 70 ppm Vollf...

Page 905: ...de FAX 1 F Tecla de FAX 1 G Cubierta de la tecla de FAX 1 J Memoria DIMM 16 MB 1 Opción K Memoria DIMM 128 MB 1 H y I no se suministran Cuando instale el fax Dual se necesitan A B C Gelieferte Teile A FAX Leiterplatte 1 C Verschlusskappe 1 D Alphabetaufkleber 1 E Aufkleber für FAX Bedienungsabschnitt 1 F FAX Taste 1 G FAX Tastenabdeckung 1 J Speicher DIMM 16 MB 1 Option K Speicher DIMM 128 MB 1 B ...

Page 906: ...rsichtsmaßnahmen Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dämpfungs material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Schalten Sie den Netzschalter des MFP aus und trennen Sie den MFP vom Netz bevor Sie das Faxsystem installieren Verfahren Installation der DIMM Speichermodule 1 Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben 1 und nehmen Sie dann die Abdeckung 2 ab 2 Setzen Sie das DIMM Speichermodul J oder das optionale DIMM...

Page 907: ... 3 Bringen Sie die Abdeckung 2 wieder mit den 2 Schrauben 1 an Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse 4 Die Abdeckung 4 öffnen 5 2 Schrauben 6 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 5 des Einschubs OPT1 ent fernen OPT2 nicht verrwenden Angaben zur Installation der FAX Leiter platte als Dual FAX finden Sie auf Seite 17 3 Ricollocare il coperchio 2 utilizzando le 2 viti 1 Rimozi...

Page 908: ...e FAX en el FAX dual vea la página 17 Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung Für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse und wenn der Fin isher installiert ist 4 Die Abdeckung 4 entfernen 5 2 Schrauben 6 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 5 des Einschubs OPT1 ent fernen OPT2 nicht verrwenden Angaben zur Installation der FAX Leiter platte als Dual FAX finden Sie auf Seite 17 Rimozione del coperchio vano Per MFP a veloc...

Page 909: ...queta 7 en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX A como se indica en la ilustración e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura Installieren der FAX Leiterplatte 6 FAX Leiterplatte A in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT1 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt 5 ausgebauten Schrauben 6 befestigen Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX Platine A nicht mit den Fingern Die FAX Leiterplatte A bein Einsetze...

Page 910: ...de 100 V 120 V Australiano o Chino utilice el cable conector modular B suministrado Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung 7 Telefonmodulkabel 8 in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefon dose anschließen Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel B für die 100 V 120 V Australien oder China Modelle verwenden Collegamento dell MFP alla linea del tele fono 7 Inserire il cavo connettor...

Page 911: ...os modelos de 120 V asegúrese de que no se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobación 10 Anschließen des MFP an das separate Telefon 8 Das Telefonmodulkabel 9 in die Telefonbuchse einstecken und das andere Ende an das sepa rate Telefon anschließen Wenn der MFP nicht an das separate Telefon ange schlossen wird die Oberfläche der Telefonbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und Verschlusskappe C einsetzen falls vo...

Page 912: ...Quite las cubiertas 11 y tienda el cable conector modular como se muestra en la ilustración 11 Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas 11 Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse für Neuseeland Modell 9 Dieses Verfahren nur für das Neuseeland Modell anwenden Verlegung des Modularsteckerkabels Nur MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 10 Die Abdeckungen 11 entfernen und das Modularsteckerkabel gemäß der Abbildung verlegen 11 ...

Page 913: ... finalizador está instalado 12 Vuelva a instalar la cubierta 4 MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse 12 Die Abdeckung 4 schließen Für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse und wenn der Finisher installiert ist 12 Die Abdeckung 4 wieder anbringen Per MFP a velocità media 12 Chiudere il coperchio 4 Per MFP a velocità alta e quando la finitrice è installata 12 Reinstallare il coperchio 4 中速 MFP の場合 12 カバー 4 を閉める 高...

Page 914: ... como se muestra a la izquierda y deslice las cubiertas del panel de tra bajo 13 14 para quitarlas Installieren der FAX Taste 13 Einen flachen Schraubendreher an der links mit Pfeilen 12 bezeichneten Spitze einschieben und die Bedienfeldabdeckungen 13 14 verschieben um sie dann abzunehmen Installazione del tasto FAX 13 Inserire un cacciavite a testa piana nel punto indicato dalla freccia 12 come m...

Page 915: ...jo 16 16 Quite la cubierta de la sección de la tecla de FAX 17 14 Die durchsichtige Platte 15 entfernen 15 Die Bedienfeldfolie 16 entfernen 16 Die Abdeckung 17 des FAX Tastenbe reichs entfernen 14 Rimuovere il pannello trasparente 15 15 Rimuovere il foglio 16 del pannello opera tivo 16 Rimuovere la copertura 17 della sezione tasto FAX 14 クリアパネル 15 を取り外す 15 操作パネルシート 16 を取り外す 16 FAX キー部分のカバー 17 を取り外...

Page 916: ... G 17 Instale la tecla de FAX F 18 Instale la cubierta de la tecla de FAX G 17 Die FAX Taste F anbringen 18 Die Abdeckung G der FAX Taste anbrin gen 17 Installare il tasto FAX F 18 Installare la copertura G del tasto FAX 17 FAX キー F を取り付ける 18 FAX キーカバー G を取り付ける 17 安装 FAX 键 F 18 安装 FAX 键盖板 G 17 FAX 키 F 를 부착합니다 18 FAX 키커버 G 를 부착합니다 F ...

Page 917: ...e la etiqueta de la sección de funcionamiento del FAX E del idioma correspondiente Anbringen der Alphabetaufkleber ausgenommen 100 V Modelle 19 Den Bereich über den Zifferntasten an der Bedienfeldfolie 16 mit Alkohol abwischen und die Alphabetaufkleber D hier anbringen In Asien und Ozeanien den Aufkleber PQRS TUV WXYZ verwenden nicht die Aufkleber PRS TUV WXY und OPER verwenden Anbringen des Aufkl...

Page 918: ...ransparente 15 23 Vuelva a instalar las cubiertas del panel de trabajo 13 14 21 Die Bedienfeldfolie 16 anbringen 22 Die durchsichtige Platte 15 wieder anbrin gen 23 Die Bedienfeldabdeckungen 13 14 wie der anbringen 21 Applicare il foglio del pannello operativo 16 22 Reinstallare il pannello trasparente 15 23 Reinstallare i coperchi 13 14 del pannello operativo 21 操作パネルシート 16 を取り付ける 22 クリアパネル 15 を取...

Page 919: ... los modelos de 110 V 24 Realice el procedimiento sólo para los modelos de Chino o 110 V Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen für China nur 110 V Modelle 24 Dieses Verfahren nur für die China oder 110 VModelle anwenden Applicare l etichetta di approvazione per Cina solo per i modelli da 110 V 24 Eseguire questa procedura solo per modelli da Cina o 110 V 規格ラベルの貼り付け 中国 110V 仕様のみ 24 この手順は中国 110V 仕様のみお...

Page 920: ... de circuitos de FAX a OPT2 vaya a los siguientes procedimientos Cuando no lo instala vaya a la página 23 Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen nur für Australien Neuseeland Modell 25 Dieses Verfahren nur für das Australien Neuseeland Modell anwenden Wenn das optionale Dual FAX installiert wird Hinzufügen der FAX Leiterplatte zu OPT2 mit den folgenden Verfahren fortfahren Erfolgt diese Installation ...

Page 921: ... y después quite la cubi erta de la ranura OPT2 3 Installieren des Dual FAX Die mitgelieferten Teile sind auf Seite 1 aufgelistet Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse 1 Die Abdeckung 1 öffnen 2 2 Schrauben 2 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 3 des Einschubs OPT2 ent fernen Installare il Dual FAX Fare riferimento alla pagina 1 per le parti in dot azione Rimozione del cop...

Page 922: ...ornillos 2 y después quite la cubi erta de la ranura OPT2 3 Entfernen der Einschubabdeckung Für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse und wenn der Fin isher installiert ist 1 Die Abdeckung 1 entfernen 2 2 Schrauben 2 entfernen und dann die Abdeckung 3 des Einschubs OPT2 ent fernen Rimozione del coperchio vano Per MFP a velocità alta e quando la finitrice è installata 1 Rimuovere il coperchio 1 2 Rimuovere l...

Page 923: ...ueta 4 en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX A como se indica en la ilustración e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura Installieren der FAX Leiterplatte 3 FAX Leiterplatte A in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT2 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt 2 ausgebauten Schrauben 2 befestigen Berühren Sie die Anschlüsse der FAX Platine A nicht mit den Fingern Die FAX Leiterplatte A bein Einsetzen...

Page 924: ... asegúrese de que no se fije sobre la etiqueta de aprobación 5 Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse 4 Die Oberfläche der Telefonanschlussbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und die Verschlusskappe C anbringen Die Telefonanschlussbuchse der in OPT2 installierten FAX Leiterplatte ist nicht verfügbar ungül tig Die Anschlussbuchse vollkommen versiegeln um den Anschluss eines separaten Telefons zu verhindern Bei 12...

Page 925: ...odelos de 100 V 120 V Australiano o Chino utilice el cable conector modular B suministrado Anschließen des MFP an die Telefonleitung 5 Telefonmodulkabel 6 in die Gerätebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose anschließen Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel B für die 100 V 120 V Australien oder China Modelle verwenden Collegamento dell MFP alla linea del telefono 5 Inserire il cavo conn...

Page 926: ... finalizador está instalado 8 Vuelva a instalar la cubierta 1 Verlegung des Modularsteckerkabels Nur MFP der Hochleistungsklasse 6 Die Abdeckungen 7 entfernen und das Modularsteckerkabel gemäß der Abbildung verlegen 7 Die Abdeckungen 7 wieder anbringen MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse 8 Die Abdeckung 1 schließen Für MFP der Hochleistungsklasse und wenn der Finisher installiert ist 8 Die Abdeckung...

Page 927: ...terplatte 1 Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter einschalten 2 Wenn die FAX Leiterplatte nur in OPT1 oder sowohl in OPT1 als auch in OPT2 installiert worden ist um alle FAX Leiterplatten zu initialisie ren Wartungsmodus U600 ausführen um die Faxsteuerbaugruppe zu initialisieren 3 Wenn die FAX Leiterplatte zu OPT2 hinzugefügt worden ist um die FAX Leiter platte in OPT2 zu...

Page 928: ...INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR DOCUMENT TABLE ...

Page 929: ...A C D E F I B G H J M4 14 2 M4 8 7 2 3 1 ...

Page 930: ...5 6 7 4 C A B ...

Page 931: ...8 I 9 J 9 ...

Page 932: ...14 10 11 13 D J 12 ...

Page 933: ...G E F 18 15 16 17 J ...

Page 934: ...H 19 20 ...

Page 935: ...2011 ...

Page 936: ...2011 ...

Reviews:

No comments